Home

ES-2108 Series Ethernet Switch User's Guide

1. 197 261 The Mantenanto SETER arimea E AR E 197 Poe EO Fao DBIBHUE an 198 20a oae GOU Arap A A 198 cicedocon S E Cer 199 20 0 Firmware UDGTAGE sccadcssiscccuscusesccecthantscocashiied onasenmris adeeaits a ia sebnsacactbaiaanas 199 GG Pesiore a Comgurahon FIE 1 asia or bete ppt rdg ct Ee rani ra ates en ad RR 199 eB Backup Congue oh FIIS coudissscu Epi ie EU ro USER OIBO RR CHER FORI LEM REV D c OUR DRE 200 206 TP Command LIne cicoria a Eaa NU NIRE MR a ARE 200 ZG BA Filename DO NS i scsi situation oerusi cinoindncsn dO gast radio fb inn rauca de ii nc dla 201 25 5 2 FIP Command Line Procede ucicsdscbsteritesse iet Ud bees Qu ga go tone idt baths Raia 201 258 2 GUbbased FTF GIES siinsete PE OM ERE ERR RED C RP ERU aM EU UA Md 202 PEO FTP EOS ONE ianaisscnaais Sera E Reni sb o dar ES Rai FEES Cas E usa Ede CREER ERE a EE 202 Chapter 27 li Rc 203 Aro cEPuriibet 7 aee m 203 27 2 The Access Control Mal Sol Beli escoissen ede E Eso aua ELE a ugar 203 era Aba SNIP uissxestertxtatisdtin en OR ppt uc UR Pad NP PAI ten oru dos rd a Desv Omm edun 204 Eo SNMP vs aids aues nan acad rr pera a oa ncc padece daas 205 ZI Ee MIB E E E E A E A NE oUfadl bean sani i Db ute 205 DECR EC LIMIT c Meer ty caediied pts accords EE a E 205 EXEC Nei Sc I niaaa Greg dat badcevad Sands Sptaadaed sav anele 208 273 5 Ooniigunig SN
2. 137 DNE BCEEC UT S ec Lace lidaadeheavieietiaauieam IdabeeeneS 137 POMMES spo oo ade ss cicec neaianueibnd natwndeed mpaadaueda tea papas ptvantad uomnaN aa saataeMRsGds 137 TELA TONP USM noana a D DD Aa 137 TOTS GMF SN iarria eaaet e a M M 137 1914 IGMPSneeping and VLANS 12 eg ua a ont pota a dura ld bbc 138 iba MuecuRcpupcqee t eem m 138 iesus ME 138 19 4 RSMP Shopping VERI uuu tuin ad o E Stra Ead eoo kar d Ear Fo usato DOE na 140 i de laxi siu eet ETE 142 D Eg LinEes 7 dece c mU 143 1580 1 Types or MYR PONE iiis iiim daskE dO ke xx URNA E DoD adam EEE oui ru pi Od rade 144 pie IVE MOORS s 144 prog nis We Ee on c E 144 19 7 General MYR IGE cides act ceca tes M EERECE Ea lA epRI RR RS pA 145 198 bilEeDheTeEmpsnru n etc 146 19 9 3 MYR Coniauhatem Example saiuiiaedoua diner debeant oed akku a Ra Rd da ta 148 Chapter 20 Authentication amp ACCOUNTING iaseseiasac iine nnuxae5aE ab RARI AER RETRETEMRA ELA EM RAE UBI A 0 ninnaa iiaae 151 20 1 Authentication Authorization and Accounting sessssssseeeeeeeree 151 JEMEN TI Ser c T A 181 202 RADIUS and TROU e aucscpesdbrenvisdontecinidabbezstuddide eee vidin base nid dgiterda ese bec dii du duse 152 20 2 Authentication and Accounting SOIGOlg aaeocceamcekeuse pee brend eee ores a dL eae ERE RR ERE ERE p cad 152 20 21 RADIUS SENET SON iusdxecasituentdik reo MU ERR dU EVA aai EX dd Rud can 152 202 2 puede ric ur cm 154 20 2 3 Au
3. The Switch also shuts down port N if the probe packet returns to switch A on any other port In other words loop guard also protects against standard network loops The following figure illustrates three switches forming a loop A sample path of the loop guard probe packet is also shown In this example the probe packet is sent from port N and returns on another port As long as loop guard is enabled on port N The Switch will shut down port N if it detects that the probe packet has returned to the Switch Figure 101 Loop Guard Network Loop ES 2108 Series User s Guide Chapter 22 Loop Guard BS After resolving the loop problem on your network you can re activate the disabled port via the web configurator see Section 7 7 on page 80 or via commands see the CLI Reference Guide 22 2 Loop Guard Setup Click Advanced Application Loop Guard in the navigation panel to display the screen as shown ES The loop guard feature can not be enabled on the ports that have Spanning Tree Protocol RSTP or MSTP enabled Figure 102 Advanced Application gt Loop Guard OIE aD Active O Port Active Oo Oo Non 4 C0 No o D D IDEEDEDEDTDEDTDTI Apply Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 64 Advanced Application gt Loop Guard LABEL DESCRIPTION Active
4. Table 65 IP Application gt Static Routing LABEL DESCRIPTION Active This field allows you to activate deactivate this static route Name Enter a descriptive name up to 10 printable characters for identification purposes Destination IP This parameter specifies the IP network address of the final destination Routing is Address always based on network number If you need to specify a route to a single host use a subnet mask of 255 255 255 255 in the subnet mask field to force the network number to be identical to the host ID IP Subnet Enter the subnet mask for this destination Mask Gateway IP Enter the IP address of the gateway The gateway is an immediate neighbor of your Address Switch that will forward the packet to the destination The gateway must be a router on the same segment as your Switch Metric The metric represents the cost of transmission for routing purposes IP routing uses hop count as the measurement of cost with a minimum of 1 for directly connected networks Enter a number that approximates the cost for this link The number need not be precise but it must be between 1 and 15 In practice 2 or 3 is usually a good number Add Click Add to insert a new static route Clicking Add saves your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile m
5. 195 basate HR saeua Loneaa a Pe aoa bap Er ER Eo drca a RE BE bru Bela a daga Fas LER d P 197 rmv ci pecia MP 203 Rr 221 ES 2108 Series User s Guide 9 Contents Overview BUS oua Rca ans agen nani ar raros Fl bL du rac kp rb Dor RR I 223 ETSY TOL MIE I cuasdaceassetesaresdounts E T lam deant bem dr kt dudas ta Das d uns 227 MAC TADIG E 233 ARP TIDE eec PEE 235 TS AUIS CUNY zea torinaet i acetate b bed dta toes uaaete ead ecuey eile s R eat RUD meat eee 237 Troubleshooting and Appendices a accccciccccincsicscctatseanavasnestensasansavsanennsnnssraresuandasenneeretansnenes 239 PRGA USS MOLINE 5 UU UU 241 ES 2108 Series User s Guide Table of Contents Table of Contents About This Users t 3 D ument Convento 4 c lik i ee ee ra a E ean eee ene nee ee eee 6 i i 14 1 e 9 Table pp 11 4 21 T WwVNI Me M 25 Part l ire 2i e 29 Chapter 1 Gelting to Know Your SWIEGI aeneis hatt mast t ha inh a AONE reine NAR KAATE 31 DRM IPM D I III IT 31 LLOBaCRbOHE ARPE oo
6. Port Source Port Receiver Port None Tagging ia None 1 o r 2 O e rn C s C 4 c O E 5 O e ET 6 c Cc e B ee MINE ee ee 8 c e e a 9 e Ce rH Add Cancel VLAN Active Name Mode Source Port Receiver Port 802 1p Delete Delete Cancel To set the Switch to forward the multicast group traffic to the subscribers configure multicast group settings in the Group Configuration screen The following figure shows an example where two multicast groups News and Movie are configured for the multicast VLAN 200 Figure 83 MVR Group Configuration Example E D Multicast VLAN ID 200 z lt zo Name Start Address News 2241 410 End Address 224 1 4 50 Add Cancel MVLAN Name Start Address End Address Delete All Delete Group 200 3 Movie 230 1 2 50 230 1 2 60 n Delete Cancel ES 2108 Series User s Guide Chapter 19 Multicast Figure 84 MVR Group Configuration Example Group Configuration EN NN Multicast VLAN ID 200 z lt pa Name Start Address 0 0 0 0 Add Cancel Name News Delete All ri Start Address End Address Movie 230 1 2 50 230 1 2 60 224 1 4 10 224 1 4 50 Delete Cancel End Address 0 0 0 0 Delete Gr r r ES 2108 Series User s Guide Authentication amp Accounting This chapter describ
7. ES 2108 Series User s Guide PART III Advanced Setup VLAN 87 Static MAC Forwarding 97 Filtering 99 Spanning Tree Protocol 101 Bandwidth Control 115 Broadcast Storm Control 117 Mirroring 119 Link Aggregation 121 Port Authentication 127 Port Security 131 Queuing Method 135 Multicast 137 Authentication amp Accounting 151 IP Source Guard 165 Loop Guard 175 VLAN The type of screen you see here depends on the VLAN Type you selected in the Switch Setup screen This chapter shows you how to configure 802 1Q tagged and port based VLANs 8 1 Introduction to IEEE 802 1Q Tagged VLAN A tagged VLAN uses an explicit tag VLAN ID in the MAC header to identify the VLAN membership of a frame across bridges they are not confined to the switch on which they were created The VLANs can be created statically by hand or dynamically through GVRP The VLAN ID associates a frame with a specific VLAN and provides the information that switches need to process the frame across the network A tagged frame is four bytes longer than an untagged frame and contains two bytes of TPID Tag Protocol Identifier residing within the type length field of the Ethernet frame and two bytes of TCI Tag Control Information starts after the source address field of the Ethernet frame The CFI Canonical Format Indicator is a single bit flag always set to zero for Ethernet switches If a frame received at an Et
8. Figure 69 Advanced Application gt Port Authentication gt 802 1x XvAEEEEEDP Port Authentication Active O Port Active Reauthentication Reauthentication Timer 4 2 4 seconds 600 seconds Y 600 seconds 600 seconds 600 seconds 600 seconds 4 600 seconds 600 seconds 600 seconds RARE 600 seconds 3 olololololololololo 5 2 p J 2 P j 9 Il ll Ii ll Ii Il Apply The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 37 Advanced Application gt Port Authentication gt 802 1x LABEL DESCRIPTION Active Select this check box to permit 802 1x authentication on the Switch Note You must first enable 802 1x authentication on the Switch before configuring it on each port Port This field displays a port number i Settings in this row apply to all ports Use this row only if you want to make some settings the same for all ports Use this row first to set the common settings and then make adjustments on a port by port basis Note Changes in this row are copied to all the ports as soon as you make them Active Select this check box to permit 802 1x authentication on this port You must first allow 802 1x authentication on the Switch before configuring it on each port Reauthentication Specify if a subscriber has to periodically re enter his or her username and password to stay connected to the port Re
9. Oo mo V Y V OM MO DM MO HM 20 3 2 3 Attributes Used for Accounting IEEE 802 1x Events The attributes are listed in the following table along with the time of the session they are sent Table 56 RADIUS Attributes Exec Events via Console ATTRIBUTE START INTERIM UPDATE STOP User Name a NAS IP Address NAS Port Class Called Station Id Calling Station Id NAS Identifier Oo oOo 9 MO DM MO IV Y v vj mo 0 o m mim mo moj mo ES 2108 Series User s Guide Chapter 20 Authentication amp Accounting Table 56 RADIUS Attributes Exec Events via Console ATTRIBUTE START INTERIM UPDATE STOP NAS Port Type a Acct Status Type Acct Delay Time Acct Session ld Acct Authentic wmv v V Acct Input Octets Acct Output Octets Acct Session Time Acct Input Packets Acct Output Packets VIVI V V V V MO Pj vj Acct Terminate Cause Acct Input Gigawords fo Acct Output Gigawords oo V V V oO Oo Mo MO Mo MO vj mmo ES 2108 Series User s Guide Chapter 20 Authentication amp Accounting ES 2108 Series User s Guide IP Source Guard Use IP source guard to filter unauthorized ARP packets in your network 21 1 IP Source Guard Overview IP source guard uses a binding table to distinguish between authorized and
10. ES 2108 Series User s Guide Est Chapter 1 Getting to Know Your Switch The Switch can be used standalone for a group of heavy traffic users You can connect computers directly to the Switch s port or connect other switches to the Switch In this example all computers can share high speed applications on the server To expand the network simply add more networking devices such as switches routers computers print servers etc Figure 1 Backbone Application 1 1 2 Bridging Example In this example application the Switch connects different company departments RD and Sales to the corporate backbone It can alleviate bandwidth contention and eliminate server and network bottlenecks All users that need high bandwidth can connect to high speed department servers via the Switch For ES 2108G you can provide a super fast uplink connection by using a Gigabit Ethernet mini GBIC port on the Switch Moreover the Switch eases supervision and maintenance by allowing network managers to centralize multiple servers at a single location Figure 2 Bridging Application ins Intemet gt Er ed LO L2 LO z ea LS Sales 1 et LI L 4 See Bee eee SS Se mm mmm nomm m m m m mm i m UM A MR UR GR a 32 ES 2108 Series User s Guide Chapter 1 Getting to Know Your Switch 1 1 3 High Performance Switched Example The Switch is ideal for connecting two ne
11. Relay Agent Information Option 82 Information ES 2108 G Add Cancel Clear VID Type DHCP Status Delete Relay 192 168 1 100 O I Delete Cancel ES 2108 Series User s Guide PART V Management Maintenance 197 Access Control 203 Diagnostic 221 Syslog 223 Cluster Management 227 233 ARP Table 235 Configure Clone 237 Maintenance This chapter explains how to configure the maintenance screens that let you maintain the firmware and configuration files 26 1 The Maintenance Screen Click Management gt Maintenance in the navigation panel to open the following screen Figure 116 Management gt Maintenance amp Maintenance Current Configuration 1 Firmware Upgrade Click Here Restore Configuration Click Here Backup Configuration Click Here Load Factory Default Click Here Save Configuration Config 1 Reboot System Config 1 The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 73 Management gt Maintenance LABEL DESCRIPTION Current This field displays the configuration file Configuration 1 the Switch is currently using Firmware Access this screen to upload new firmware Upgrade Restore Access this screen to upload a previously saved configuration file to the Switch Configuration Backup Access this screen to back up the current Switch configuration Configuration Load Factory Click the
12. Figure 108 IP Application gt DiffServ gt DSCP Setting 8 16 24 3 32 4 o EN 48 6 56 Fal OWS aD DSCP to 802 1p Mapping 1 9 17 25 33 41 49 57 e z 4 Cn c 1 m s lom s om bm Ts i hA a hA 12 hA ne hA u hA 5 hH 2 18 29 19 29 2 pA 2 RA 22 RA 23 kA 3v 26 3 m 27 3 28 3v 29 NE 30 3v 31 3v dx 34 4 v 35 4 v 36 dv 37 4v 38 dx 39 4 s 42 s 43 5m 44 s 45 s gt 4B s 47 s 6 50 6 gt 41 BY 52 6 53 6 54 6 55 6 7 s x 59 Pa oo PA ot Pa 62 7 s H Apply Cancel ES 2108 Series User s Guide El Coo J Chapter 24 Differentiated Services The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 68 IP Application gt DiffServ gt DSCP Setting LABEL DESCRIPTION 0 63 This is the DSCP classification identification number To set the IEEE802 1p priority mapping select the priority level from the drop down list box Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to discard all changes and start configuring the screen again ES 2108 Series User s Guide DHCP This chapter shows you how to configure the DHCP f
13. Figure 144 MAC Table Flowchart E Is destination MAC address in the MAC Table Yes Is the outgoing port different from the incoming port Filter this Forward to frame outgoing port ES 2108 Series User s Guide 233 Chapter 31 MAC Table 31 2 Viewing the MAC Table BS Click MAC VID or Port in the Sort by field to display the MAC address entries Click Management gt MAC Table in the navigation panel to display the following screen Figure 145 Management gt MAC Table Sort by Index 1 2 3 4 5 ED MAC Table g MAC VID Port MAC Address VID Port Type 00 85 30 01 01 00 1 8 dynamic 00 85 30 01 01 04 1 dynamic 00 a0 c5 00 00 01 1 2 dynamic 00 a0 c5 fe ea 71 1 CPU static 00 a0 c5 fe ea 71 2 CPU static The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 97 Management gt MAC Table LABEL DESCRIPTION Sort by Click one of the following buttons to display and arrange the data according to that button type The information is then displayed in the summary table below MAC Click this button to display and arrange the data according to MAC address VID Click this button to display and arrange the data according to VLAN group Port Click this button to display and arrange the data according to port number This field displays Drop if you configure a filtering rule to drop the traffic from the MAC address Index This is the
14. New Password Retype to confirm Please record your new password whenever you change it The system will lock you out if you have forgotten your password Edit Logins Login User Name Password Retype to confirm re rs M s l a ee EEEEEEEEEEEN Apply Cancel 4 4 Saving Your Configuration When you are done modifying the settings in a screen click Apply to save your changes back to the run time memory Settings in the run time memory are lost when the Switch s power is turned off Click the Save link in the upper right hand corner of the web configurator to save your configuration to nonvolatile memory Nonvolatile memory refers to the Switch s storage that remains even if the Switch s power is turned off BS Use the Save link when you are done with a configuration session 4 5 Switch Lockout You could block yourself and all others from accessing the Switch through the web configurator if you do one of the following 1 Deleting the management VLAN default is VLAN 1 2 Deleting all port based VLANs with the CPU port as a member The CPU port is the management port of the Switch 3 Filtering all traffic to the CPU port 4 Disabling all ports ES 2108 Series User s Guide Chapter 4 The Web Configurator BS 5 Assigning minimum bandwidth to the CPU port If you limit bandwidth to the CPU port you may find that the Switch performs sluggishly or not at all Be ca
15. None v Apply Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 35 Advanced Application gt Link Aggregation gt Link Aggregation Setting LABEL DESCRIPTION Link Aggregation Setting This is the only screen you need to configure to enable static link aggregation Group ID The field identifies the link aggregation group that is one logical link containing multiple ports Active Select this option to activate a trunk group Port This field displays the port number Group Select the trunk group to which a port belongs Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh ES 2108 Series User s Guide 125 Chapter 15 Link Aggregation 15 5 Link Aggregation Control Protocol Click in the Advanced Application gt Link Aggregation gt Link Aggregation Setting gt LACP to display the screen shown next See Section 15 2 on page 121 for more information on dynamic link aggregation Figure 64 Advanced Application gt Link Aggregation gt Link Aggregation Setting gt LACP DESDE Eee IIIS Link Aggregation Setting Active D System Priority
16. 890 Assignment Vendor Type 2 Vendor data egress rate Kbps in decimal format Privilege Assignment vendor ID 890 Vendor Type 3 Vendor Data shell priv lvlzN or Vendor ID 9 CISCO Vendor Type 1 CISCO AVPAIR Vendor Data shell priv lvlzN where N is a privilege level from 0 to 14 Note If you set the privilege level of a login account differently on the RADIUS server s and the Switch the user is assigned a privilege level from the database RADIUS or local the Switch uses first for user authentication 20 2 4 1 Tunnel Protocol Attribute You can configure tunnel protocol attributes on the RADIUS server refer to your RADIUS server documentation to assign a port on the Switch to a VLAN based on IEEE 802 1x authentication The port VLAN settings are fixed and untagged This will also set the port s VID The following table describes the values you need to configure Note that the bolded values in the table are fixed values as defined in RFC 3580 Table 53 Supported Tunnel Protocol Attribute FUNCTION ATTRIBUTE VLAN Assignment Tunnel Type VLAN 13 Tunnel Medium Typ 802 6 Tunnel Private Group ID VLAN ID Note You must also create a VLAN with the specified VID on the Switch 20 3 Supported RADIUS Attributes Remote Authentication Dial In User Service RADIUS attributes are data used to define specific authentication and accounting elements in
17. LNK ACT Green Blinking The port is receiving or transmitting data On The port has a connection to an Ethernet network but not receiving or transmitting data Off The link to an Ethernet network is down LNK mini Green On The port has a successful connection ae gu Off No Ethernet device is connected to this port Slot ACT mini Green Blinking The port is sending or receiving data E gs Off The port is not sending or receiving data Slot LNK 100 FX Green On The port has a successful connection Off No Ethernet device is connected to this port ES 2108 Series User s Guide Chapter 3 Hardware Overview Table 3 LEDs continued LED COLOR STATUS DESCRIPTION ACT 100 FX Green Blinking The port is sending or receiving data Off The port is not sending or receiving data ES 2108 Series User s Guide PART Il Basic Configuration The Web Configurator 51 Initial Setup Example 61 System Status and Port Statistics 65 Basic Setting 71 The Web Configurator This section introduces the configuration and functions of the web configurator This guide primarily uses the ES 2108G screen shots as an example The screens may vary slightly for different ES 2108 models Not all fields are available on all models 4 1 Introduction The web configurator is an HTML based management interface that allows easy Switch setup and management via Internet browser Use
18. asus onde t tren ri brei d ERR ROV exta E Rp beer Dd qe rav dV M RA 46 EC D acsi rii e MR 46 uz cr rU PR 47 Fart I Basic LConTIgarellOllu usen panes pnaE tor EAE LEE nEER USE PIS M PE US UDRMDM DER Rd 49 Chapter 4 The SR fee 51 EE IUISO Ir TO T S N A 51 A2 ovsem LODI soricei aa aa r iae aE EE OENE 51 erae ever ro e A E E N A T 52 45 1 Change Your Fass word lt ivieccticuteiediceuleu i aruleselaaeiicntenauion E 56 2 4 Savna Your Conio AO aceto Deren er NAE ANNA 57 Bo N LOOO Saaana A A tan S bist uL aa 57 A20 Messing Me SWIGEV eicit ces or aar Aa Ea EE E AAS 58 4 6 1 Reload the Factory default Configuration File ecccecccesesseeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeetaes 58 4 7 Legging Out or the Web ConfiguFelel 22i eet id ignbcs a iiine ERAN 59 LEID D MX 58 Chapter 5 Mial Senp EXIME fece C 61 L VE NNNM ERN T 61 Belo Greaing a VLAN M 61 Bot sm PPE VIE sedile ipa end rero ek da rn penc suas adam R 63 5 1 3 Configuring the Management IP Address c ccceseeceeeeeeeeeeececeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeteaaeeesnees 63 Chapter 6 System Status and Port Stas siise sss nerit decd ponen neto naaar eaa Ran Enn Rap ia Raa 65 ME CER USO 115 Malt NER a 65 mm cru cns c ada eee 66 Chapter 7 Base SETUMO mm 71 EOV m 71 ONT WARRING auscoccaan caseo bct ipod due E xa oa ott d sonia boc ER aei ae cu Ed a Ga 71 n ccyoccR OI M e e 73 FE Prodo Honto VLAN t A aes 7
19. lt gt Do NOT block the ventilation holes Leave space between devices when stacking For proper ventilation allow at least 4 inches 10 cm of clearance at the front and 3 4 inches 8 cm at the back of the Switch This is especially important for enclosed rack installations ES 2108 Series User s Guide Chapter 2 Hardware Installation and Connection 2 2 Mounting the Switch on a Rack This section lists the rack mounting requirements and precautions and describes the installation steps gt Do NOT block the ventilation holes Make sure that no objects obstruct the airflow of the fans 2 2 1 Rack mounted Installation Requirements Two mounting brackets Eight M3 flat head screws and a 2 Phillips screwdriver Four M5 flat head screws and a 2 Phillips screwdriver D gt Failure to use the proper screws may damage the unit 2 2 1 1 Precautions Make sure the rack will safely support the combined weight of all the equipment it contains Make sure the position of the Switch does not make the rack unstable or top heavy Take all necessary precautions to anchor the rack securely before installing the unit 2 2 2 Attaching the Mounting Brackets to the Switch 1 Position a mounting bracket on one side of the Switch lining up the four screw holes on the bracket with the screw holes on the side of the Switch Figure 7 Attaching the Mounting Brackets 2 Using a 2 Phillips screwdriver install
20. 4 Add Cancel Instance VLAN Active Port Delete 0 1 4094 z Delete Cancel ES 2108 Series User s Guide Chapter 11 Spanning Tree Protocol The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 27 Advanced Application gt Spanning Tree Protocol gt MSTP LABEL DESCRIPTION Status Click Status to display the MSTP Status screen see Figure 58 on page 113 Active Select this check box to activate MSTP on the Switch Clear this check box to disable MSTP on the Switch Note You must also activate Multiple Spanning Tree in the Advanced Application gt Spanning Tree Protocol gt Configuration screen to enable MSTP on the Switch Hello Time This is the time interval in seconds between BPDU Bridge Protocol Data Units configuration message generations by the root switch The allowed range is 1 to 10 seconds MaxAge This is the maximum time in seconds a switch can wait without receiving a BPDU before attempting to reconfigure All switch ports except for designated ports should receive BPDUs at regular intervals Any port that ages out STP information provided in the last BPDU becomes the designated port for the attached LAN If it is a root port a new root port is selected from among the Switch ports attached to the network The allowed range is 6 to 40 seconds Forwarding Delay This is the maximum time in seconds a switch will wait before changing states This delay is required because
21. 65535 Group ID LACP Active T1 O T2 O Port LACP Timeout ui 30 v seconds 1 30 seconds 2 30 v seconds 3 30 v seconds 4 30 seconds 5 30 v seconds 6 30 v seconds 7 30 seconds 8 30 seconds Apply Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 36 Advanced Application gt Link Aggregation gt Link Aggregation Setting gt LACP LABEL DESCRIPTION o oim Note Do not configure this screen unless you want to enable Control dynamic link aggregation Protocol Active Select this checkbox to enable Link Aggregation Control Protocol LACP System LACP system priority is a number between 1 and 65 535 The switch with the lowest Priority system priority and lowest port number if system priority is the same becomes the LACP server The LACP server controls the operation of LACP setup Enter a number to set the priority of an active port using Link Aggregate Control Protocol LACP The smaller the number the higher the priority level Group ID The field identifies the link aggregation group that is one logical link containing multiple ports LACP Active Select this option to enable LACP for a trunk Port This field displays the port number ES 2108 Series User s Guide Chapter 15 Link Aggregation Table 36 Advanced Application gt Link Aggregation gt Link Aggregation Setting gt LACP LABEL DESCRIPTION Setting
22. Chapter 11 Spanning Tree Protocol Figure 56 Advanced Application gt Spanning Tree Protocol Status RSTP Spanning Tree Protocol Status Spanning Tree Protocol RSTP Bridge Root Bridge ID 0000 000000000000 Hello Time second 0 Max Age second 0 Forwarding Delay second 0 Cost to Bridge 0 Port ID 0x0000 Topology Changed Times 0 Time Since Last Change 0 00 00 Configuration RSTP MSTP Our Bridge 0000 000000000000 0 0 0 The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 26 Advanced Application gt Spanning Tree Protocol Status RSTP LABEL DESCRIPTION Configuration Click Configuration to specify which STP mode you want to activate Click RSTP to edit RSTP settings on the Switch Bridge Root refers to the base of the spanning tree the root bridge Our Bridge is this Switch This Switch may also be the root bridge Bridge ID This is the unique identifier for this bridge consisting of bridge priority plus MAC address This ID is the same for Root and Our Bridge if the Switch is the root switch Hello Time This is the time interval in seconds at which the root switch transmits a second configuration message The root bridge determines Hello Time Max Age and Forwarding Delay Max Age second This is the maximum time in seconds a switch can wait without receiving a configuration message before attempting to reconfigure Forwarding Delay second Th
23. Refer to the chapter on VLAN Figure 35 Basic Setting gt Switch Setup Switch Setup VLAN Type See C PortBased MAC Address Learning Aging Time 300 seconds Jain Timer 200 milliseconds GARP Timer Leave Timer 600 milliseconds Leave All Timer 10000 milliseconds Priority Queue Assignment level 3 level6 3 levels 2 level4 2 level3 fi level2 o level o v level 1 Apply Cancel ES 2108 Series User s Guide Chapter 7 Basic Setting The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 11 Basic Setting gt Switch Setup LABEL DESCRIPTION VLAN Type Choose 802 1Q or Port Based The VLAN Setup screen changes depending on whether you choose 802 1Q VLAN type or Port Based VLAN type in this screen See Chapter 8 on page 87 for more information MAC Address MAC address learning reduces outgoing traffic broadcasts For MAC address Learning learning to occur on a port the port must be active Aging Time Enter a time from 10 to 3000 seconds This is how long all dynamically learned MAC addresses remain in the MAC address table before they age out and must be relearned GARP Timer Switches join VLANs by making a declaration A declaration is made by issuing a Join message using GARP Declarations are withdrawn by issuing a Leave message A Leave All message terminates all registrations GARP timers set declaration timeout values See the chapter on VLAN setup
24. Save Statud O Logout Help Por Status BC ODE Port Name Link State PD LACP TxPkts RxPkts Errors TxKBis RxKBis a 1 100M F FORWARDING Of Disabled 270 416 0 7 253 00 0 09 46 Manag 2 Down STOP Of Disabled 0 D 0 00 00 00000 3 100M F FORWARDING Of Disabled 204 268 0 6997 3236 00225 4 Down STOP Of Disabled 0 0 0 00 00 00000 5 Down STOP Of Disabled 0 0 0 00 00 00000 A 6 Down STOP Of Disabled 0 D 0 00 00 00000 1 Down STOP Of Disabled 0 0 0 00 00 00000 8 Down STOP Of Disabled 0 0 0 00 00 00000 9 Down STOP Disabled 0 0 0 00 00 00000 G Any p eer C Port __ Copyright 1995 by ZyXEL Communications Corp A Click the menu items to open submenu links and then click on a submenu link to open the screen in the main window B C D E These are quick links which allow you to perform certain tasks no matter which screen you are currently working in B Click this link to save your configuration into the Switch s nonvolatile memory Nonvolatile memory is the configuration of your Switch that stays the same even if the Switch s power is turned off C Click this link to go to the status page of the Switch ES 2108 Series User s Guide Chapter 4 The Web Configurator D Click this link to logout of the web configurator E Click this link to display web help pages The help pages provide descriptions for all of the configuration screens In the navigation panel click a main link to reveal a list of
25. Setting Status LACP Port Authentication 802 1x Port Security Queuing Method Multicast Multicast Status Multicast Setting IGMP Snooping VLAN IGMP Filtering Profile MVR Group Configuration Auth and Acct RADIUS Server Setup TACACS Server Setup Auth and Acct Setup IP Source Guard Static Binding ARP Inspection Log Status Configure Port VLAN Loop Guard DiffServ DSCP Setting DHCP DHCP Status Global VLAN Firmware Upgrade Restore Configuration Backup Configuration Load Factory Default Save Configuration Reboot System Access Control SNMP Trap Group Logins Service Access Control Remote Management Diagnostic Syslog Syslog Setup Syslog Server Setup Cluster Management Status Configuration MAC Table ARP Table Configure Clone ES 2108 Series User s Guide Chapter 4 The Web Configurator The following table describes the links in the navigation panel Table 6 Navigation Panel Links LINK DESCRIPTION Basic Settings System Info This link takes you to a screen that displays general system and hardware monitoring information on the PWR model General Setup This link takes you to a screen where you can configure general identification information about the Switch Switch Setup This link takes you to a screen where you can set up global Switch parameters such as VLAN type MAC address learning GARP and priority queues IP Setup This link takes you to a screen wher
26. Use this screen to look at the current list of MAC address filters that were created because the Switch identified an unauthorized ARP packet When the Switch identifies an unauthorized ARP packet it automatically creates a MAC address filter to block traffic from the source MAC address and source VLAN ID of the unauthorized ARP packet To open this screen click Advanced Application gt IP Source Guard gt ARP Inspection Figure 93 Advanced Application gt IP Source Guard gt ARP Inspection Status ARP Inspection Status Log Status Configure IPSG Total number of filters 0 Index MAC Address VID Port Expiry sec Reason Delete d o The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 59 Advanced Application gt IP Source Guard gt ARP Inspection Status LABEL DESCRIPTION Total number of filters This field displays the current number of MAC address filters that were created because the Switch identified unauthorized ARP packets Index This field displays a sequential number for each MAC address filter MAC Address This field displays the source MAC address in the MAC address filter VID This field displays the source VLAN ID in the MAC address filter Port This field displays the source port of the discarded ARP packet Expiry sec This field displays how long in seconds the MAC address filter remains in the Switch You can also delete the record manually Delete
27. e g is a shorthand for for instance and i e means that is or in other words ES 2108 Series User s Guide Document Conventions Icons Used in Figures Figures in this User s Guide may use the following generic icons The Switch icon is not an exact representation of your device The Switch Computer Notebook computer aS M N lt Server Firewall NN RENE cem camas d N a GEND on NL c ca li EDS EIS UU I diri ES Telephone Switch Router we M n lt ES 2108 Series User s Guide 5 Safety Warnings Safety Warnings 3 For your safety be sure to read and follow all warning notices and instructions Do NOT use this product near water for example in a wet basement or near a swimming pool Do NOT expose your device to dampness dust or corrosive liquids Do NOT store things on the device Do NOT install use or service this device during a thunderstorm There is a remote risk of electric shock from lightning Connect ONLY suitable accessories to the device Do NOT open the device or unit Opening or removing covers can expose you to dangerous high voltage points or other risks ONLY qualified service personnel should service or disassemble this device Please contact your vendor for further information Make sure to connect the cables to the correct ports Place connecting cables carefully so that
28. gt VLAN Port Setting 93 Figure 45 Advanced Application gt VLAN Port Based VLAN Setup All Connected 95 Figure 46 Advanced Application gt VLAN Port Based VLAN Setup Port Isolation 95 Figure 47 Advanced Application gt Static MAC Forwarding sese 98 Figure 48 Advanced Application PIER iuiiseccieiet edet oe rtu E pe cci kei s cU E a aec 99 Figure 49 STP HSTEP Network EXAmpl sicccctsnccisccachniscccconsenestranteiceansenincensersmnenesaronivicennmnienncntennmdbens 104 Foure 50 NESTP Network Exaile Lorie envoi Dae V EproHMI V ppc Dann Lat Ceca Pa ibn P Po UR RON x 104 Figure 61 MSTis m Dilerent Regione ET 105 Figure 52 MSTP and Legacy ASTP Network Example icsstecccdnsscsadstuitsencsseiuedensiodanienesisiedensdeomteeass 105 Figure 53 Advanced Application gt Spanning Tree Protocol ccecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeesaeeeneneees 106 Figure 54 Advanced Application gt Spanning Tree Protocol gt Configuration ssessssss 106 Figure 55 Advanced Application gt Spanning Tree Protocol gt RSTP sse 107 Figure 56 Advanced Application gt Spanning Tree Protocol Status RSTP cccceeeeeseeeeetteeeeeeees 109 Figure 57 Advanced Application gt Spanning Tree Protocol gt MSTP sss 110 Figure 58 Advanced Application gt Spanning Tree Protocol Status MSTP sss
29. setup 192 DHCP Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol 189 251 diagnostics 221 ethernet port test 221 ping 221 system log 221 Differentiated Services DiffServ 185 DiffServ 185 activate 186 DS field 185 DSCP 185 DSCP to IEEE802 1p mapping 187 network example 185 PHB 185 dimensions 249 disclaimer 267 DS field Differentiated Services field 185 DSCP 185 DSCP to IEEE802 1p mapping 187 service level 185 what it does 185 dynamic link aggregation 121 E egress port 96 Ethernet broadcast address 235 Ethernet port test 221 Ethernet ports 43 default settings 43 external authentication server 152 F factory defaults 58 FCC interference statement 267 file transfer using FTP command example 201 filename convention 201 filtering 99 rules 99 filtering database 233 firmware upgrade 199 230 version 72 flow control 83 back pressure 83 IEEE802 3x 83 forwarding delay 111 front panel 41 FTP 34 200 file transfer procedure 201 restrictions over WAN 202 G GARP 88 GARP Generic Attribute Registration Protocol 88 GARP terminology 88 GARP timer 77 88 general features 253 general setup 73 getting help 59 GMT Greenwich Mean Time 75 ES 2108 Series User s Guide Index GVRP 88 93 GVRP GARP VLAN Registration Protocol 88 H hardware 37 by model 41 freestanding installation 37 front panel 41 mounting brackets 38 overview 41 power connector 46 precautions 38 rack mounting 38
30. 244 Figues 151 Pop up Biockor SENGS ETE UE E EE 244 Foure 152 nternet ORIONE iiaiai inn paion ana Fa a adu 245 Figure 153 Security Settings Java Soriping sesiriinsinensiienaiirdidae iea g ager ontI TES E EQUA 246 Figure 194 Securty Selings Ns Me t 246 DDR rm DECIRLE RE a EE E IT 247 Figure 158 DO PONE PROUD 2esssenonduteed dat p OY E FOR ISQEBbSHY NA 249 Figure 157 Masonry Plug and M4 Tap SOlBW Lieu sere mre et eaa d a prc t Ra goa daas 251 Figure 158 Network Number and Host ID esu cesipradee cire usE Eb nioun kamen gauge iran Ee dc ed sar ac exu sd uera gae 258 Figure 159 Subnetting Example Before Subnetlihgf 1 iaaueiccieesceiece eene natet aninion 260 Figure 160 Subnetting Example After Subnetting ssssessssssseseseeeeeenenene enne 261 Figure 161 Conflicting Computer IP Addresses Example s sss 265 Figure 162 Conflicting Computer IP Addresses Example 1 ceeetezcsseeee cenae rene nne trcna 265 Figure 163 Conflicting Computer and Router IP Addresses Example ssssssssssss 266 ES 2108 Series User s Guide List of Tables List of Tables Table 1T Model see du T 31 Kis cxi dba MEE A COD TS NE 42 Toes LEDS e 47 Table 4 Navigation Panel Sub links Overview ssssssssssseeee eee enne 53 Table 5 Web Configurator Screen Sub links Details 54 Table 6 Navigalon Panel LINKS cccicscecuneccts
31. 257 ES 2108 Series User s Guide Table of Contents Appendix C Legal Information ess cs te deceit ete aces o oT nennen 267 Appendix D RB ME LS Colgate enone ee een Pee UIS M Bolt TEM eM ee Peer 271 l 277 ES 2108 Series User s Guide Table of Contents ES 2108 Series User s Guide List of Figures List of Figures Figure 1 Backbone Fitna tees aac eats a trenes rdiet Rb I a reb d de Ca ia EORR NE DIS RARE 32 Foue Bidang INI e T 32 Figure 3 High Performance Switched ADDIIGSON auusscccccuueeetessccetasec cbe Eccc e ninaa 3d Figure Tag based VLAN ADDICOIGU riri rope or POSER Y pr RE ES aS Cop SERE pr Sa a age Lab d road 34 Figure 5 Shared Server Using VLAN Example serit ritate nt tus da nee xS Re En teda n Ape Xa d PEU UNI UR ida 34 Figure 6 Altachinig Rubber FEGT m 37 Figure 7 Attaching the Mounting Brackels 22 undo costeuseueieneuesecruaunts aes Ug o cua IDEM Eoo ni aari uc UU Ra UR 38 Figure 9 Mounng tlie Switeh on q Raek usauess cnt bete cid acer tendi M ecd oue evt eaaet bred UleU enu ap url 39 Figure 9 VOI mono EXSmpleaus ios gesGoaredax er utat Cano sae arash Fiunt ES Rc sa Ee TORRES 40 mome OFEN Pane ES ERU aiai Ond dora esfion aia ded Sanson danweineedanalserd a SNESEN 41 Ligure T1 Prom Panek ES 2TQOB E auicecsuiesescia eise E 41 Figure 12 Front Panel ES 2106 GiESSI0GPWR aui tuse decisa be d Ke e rte EA ERE RR CURA Era 42 Figure 12 Front Paral ES ZIG aued
32. 269 related documentation 3 reload default 58 remote management 219 service 220 trusted computers 220 reset 58 reset to factory default settings 198 restore configuration 58 RFC 3164 223 Round Robin Scheduling 135 RSTP 101 rubber feet 37 S safety warnings 6 saving configuration 57 service access control 218 service port 219 Simple Network Management Protocol see SNMP SNMP 34 204 agent 204 authentication 210 communities 209 management model 204 manager 204 MIB 204 205 network components 204 object variables 204 protocol operations 204 security 210 setup 208 traps 210 version 3 and security 205 versions supported 204 SNMP traps 205 supported 205 206 207 208 Spanning Tree Protocol See STP 101 SPQ Strict Priority Queuing 135 SSH 213 how it works 213 implementation 214 standby ports 121 start up problems 241 ES 2108 Series User s Guide Index static bindings 165 static MAC address 97 131 static MAC forwarding 97 static routes 181 static trunking example 125 static VLAN 91 control 92 tagging 92 status 52 LED 47 link aggregation 122 port details 66 ports 65 STP 108 112 VLAN 90 STP 101 253 bridge ID 109 bridge priority 107 configuration 107 109 designated bridge 102 forwarding delay 108 Hello BPDU 102 Hello Time 107 109 how it works 102 Max Age 108 109 path cost 102 108 port priority 108 port state 103 root port 102 status 108 112 terminology 101 vs loop guard 175 Strict Pr
33. 890 1 5 8 xx 107 7 This trap is sent when the MSTP 0 2 root switch changes mactable MacTableFullEventOn 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 xx 31 2 1 This trap is sent when more than 99 of the MAC table is used MacTableFullEventClear 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 xx 31 2 2 This trap is sent when less than 95 of the MAC table is used rmon RmonRisingAlarm 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 1 1 15 This trap is sent when a variable goes over the RMON rising threshold RmonFallingAlarm 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 1 1 16 This trap is sent when the variable falls below the RMON falling threshold 27 3 4 Configuring SNMP From the Access Control screen display the SNMP screen You can click Access Control to go back to the Access Control screen ES 2108 Series User s Guide Chapter 27 Access Control Figure 123 Management gt Access Control gt SNMP Ni a D Access Control Trap Group General Setting Version v2c m Get Community public Set Community public Trap Community public Trap Destination Version IP Port Username vac 0 0 0 0 162 vac 0 0 0 0 162 v2c 0 0 0 0 162 vac 0 0 0 0 162 User Information Index Username Security Level Authentication Privacy 1 admin noauth MD5 gt DES Apply Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 84 Management gt Access Control gt SNMP LABEL DESCRIPTION General Setting Use this section to sp
34. ARP packets are discarded or forwarded based on the VLAN ID of the ARP packet See Section 21 5 2 on page 173 Time This field displays when the log message was generated 21 5 ARP Inspection Configure Use this screen to enable ARP inspection on the Switch You can also configure the length of time the Switch stores records of discarded ARP packets and global settings for the ARP inspection log To open this screen click Advanced Application IP Source Guard ARP Inspection gt Configure ES 2108 Series User s Guide Chapter 21 IP Source Guard Figure 95 Advanced Application gt IP Source Guard gt ARP Inspection gt Configure Filter Aging Time Filter aging time Log Profile Log buffer size Syslog rate Log interval ARP Inspection Configure 4 Port Active E Bo seconds 32 entries 5 entries 1 seconds Apply Cancel VLAN ARP Inspection The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 61 Advanced Application gt IP Source Guard gt ARP Inspection gt Configure LABEL DESCRIPTION Active Select this to enable ARP inspection on the Switch You still have to enable ARP inspection on specific VLAN and specify trusted ports Filter Aging Time Filter aging time This setting has no effect on existing MAC address filters Enter how long 1 2147483647 seconds the MAC address filter remains in the Switch after the Switch identifies an
35. Appendix C Legal Information condition Any replacement will consist of a new or re manufactured functionally equivalent product of equal or higher value and will be solely at the discretion of ZyXEL This warranty shall not apply if the product has been modified misused tampered with damaged by an act of God or subjected to abnormal working conditions Note Repair or replacement as provided under this warranty is the exclusive remedy of the purchaser This warranty is in lieu of all other warranties express or implied including any implied warranty of merchantability or fitness for a particular use or purpose ZyXEL shall in no event be held liable for indirect or consequential damages of any kind to the purchaser To obtain the services of this warranty contact ZyXEL s Service Center for your Return Material Authorization number RMA Products must be returned Postage Prepaid It is recommended that the unit be insured when shipped Any returned products without proof of purchase or those with an out dated warranty will be repaired or replaced at the discretion of ZyXEL and the customer will be billed for parts and labor All repaired or replaced products will be shipped by ZyXEL to the corresponding return address Postage Paid This warranty gives you specific legal rights and you may also have other rights that vary from country to country Registration Register your product online to receive e mail notices of firmware u
36. Authentication gt 802 1X ssssssssseeeee 129 Table 38 Advanced Application gt Port Security 2er nene rta d ku ka dd A 132 ES 2108 Series User s Guide 25 List of Tables Tae 39 POI SSPEDHD Exame gurmani t nega ada t teca E Du hb namie 134 TRUNG O0 Physica Oue PIONI tls rca sinc cates aoaaa cda ed inre rotonda nae sd mins Fabel debeo nae Edna 135 Table 41 Advanced Application gt Queuing Method ssssssssssesseseeeseeeen nennen nnne 136 Table 42 Advanced Application gt Multicast Status ssssssssssseseees eene enne 138 Table 43 Advanced Application gt Multicast gt Multicast Setting sss 139 Table 44 Advanced Application gt Multicast gt Multicast Setting gt IGMP Snooping VLAN 141 Table 45 Advanced Application gt Multicast gt Multicast Setting IGMP Filtering Profile 142 Table 46 Advanced Application gt Multicast gt Multicast Setting gt MVR sese 145 Table 47 Advanced Application gt Multicast gt Multicast Setting gt MVR gt Group Configuration 147 TADIG AS RADIUS VS TACACOF disspusectadd dena Fal QR tran babs aa Ey Ga DM RUE Eo UD d Xa RUE dd S 152 Table 49 Advanced Application gt Auth and Acct gt RADIUS Server Setup sss 153 Table 50 Advanced Application gt Auth and Acct gt TACACS Server Setup ssssssssssss 155 Table 51 A
37. H for half duplex State If STP Spanning Tree Protocol is enabled this field displays the STP state of the port See Section 11 1 3 on page 103 for more information If STP is disabled this field displays FORWARDING if the link is up otherwise it displays STOP PD This fields displays whether PoE Power over Ethernet is enabled On or disabled PWR model Off on this port Only LACP This fields displays whether LACP Link Aggregation Control Protocol has been enabled on the port TxPkts This field shows the number of transmitted frames on this port RxPkts This field shows the number of received frames on this port Errors This field shows the number of received errors on this port Tx KB s This field shows the number of kilobytes per second transmitted on this port Rx KB s This field shows the number of kilobytes per second received on this port Up Time This field shows the total amount of time in hours minutes and seconds the port has been up Clear Counter Select Port and type a port number or select Any to select all ports then click Clear Counter to erase the recorded statistical information for a port or all ports 6 1 1 Status Port Details Click a number in the Port column in the Status screen to display individual port statistics Use this screen to check status and detailed performance data about an individual port on the Switch ES 2108 Series User s Guid
38. IP address field In addition the Switch puts all ones in the target MAC field FF FF FE FE FE FF is the Ethernet broadcast address The replying device which is either the IP address of the device being sought or the router that knows the way replaces the broadcast address with the target s MAC address swaps the sender and target pairs and unicasts the answer directly back to the requesting machine ARP updates the ARP Table for future reference and then sends the packet to the MAC address that replied 32 2 Viewing the ARP Table Click Management gt ARP Table in the navigation panel to open the following screen Use the ARP table to view IP to MAC address mapping s ES 2108 Series User s Guide 235 Chapter 32 ARP Table Figure 146 Management gt ARP Table c OFF Cap Index IP Address MAC Address Type 1 172 21 0 2 00 05 50 04 30 f1 dynamic 2 172 21 3 16 00 05 1c 15 08 71 dynamic 3 172 21 3 18 00 0b cd 8c 6d ed dynamic 4 172 21 3 40 00 0c 75 07 41 0d dynamic 5 172 21 3 66 00 50 8d 47 73 4f dynamic B 172 21 3 90 00 05 5d f4 49 20 dynamic 7 172 21 3 91 D0 50 ba ad 55 7c dynamic 8 172 21 3 95 00 10 b5 ae 56 97 dynamic g 172 21 3 120 00 10 b5 ae 52 32 dynamic The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 98 Management ARP Table LABEL DESCRIPTION Index This is the ARP table entry number IP Address This is the learned IP address of a device connected to a Switch port with corres
39. IP address that you entered You don t need to change the subnet mask computed by the Switch unless you are instructed to do otherwise Private IP Addresses Every machine on the Internet must have a unique address If your networks are isolated from the Internet running only between two branch offices for example you can assign any IP addresses to the hosts without problems However the Internet Assigned Numbers Authority IANA has reserved the following three blocks of IP addresses specifically for private networks 10 0 0 0 10 255 255 255 172 16 0 0 172 31 255 255 e 192 168 0 0 192 168 255 255 You can obtain your IP address from the IANA from an ISP or it can be assigned from a private network If you belong to a small organization and your Internet access is through an ISP the ISP can provide you with the Internet addresses for your local networks On the other hand if you are part of a much larger organization you should consult your network administrator for the appropriate IP addresses Regardless of your particular situation do not create an arbitrary IP address always follow the guidelines above For more information on address assignment please refer to RFC 1597 Address Allocation for Private Internets and RFC 1466 Guidelines for Management of IP Address Space ES 2108 Series User s Guide Appendix B IP Addresses and Subnetting IP Address Conflicts Each device on a network must have a uniq
40. LABEL OBJECT ID DESCRIPTION autonegotiation AutonegotiationFailedEventOn 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 xx 31 2 1 This trap is sent when an Ethernet interface fails to auto negotiate with the peer Ethernet interface AutonegotiationFailedEventClear 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 xx 31 2 2 This trap is sent when an Ethernet interface auto negotiates with the peer Ethernet interface Table 81 AAA Traps OPTION OBJECT LABEL OBJECT ID DESCRIPTION authentication authenticationFailure 1 3 6 1 6 3 1 1 5 5 This trap is sent when authentication fails due to incorrect user name and or password AuthenticationFailureEventOn 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 xx 31 2 1 This trap is sent when authentication fails due to incorrect user name and or password RADIUSNotReachableEventOn 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 xx 31 2 1 This trap is sent when there is no response message from the RADIUS server RADIUSNotReachableEventClear 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 xx 31 2 2 This trap is sent when the RADIUS server can be reached accounting RADIUSAcctNotReachableEventOn 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 xx 31 2 1 This trap is sent when there is no response message from the RADIUS accounting server RADIUSAcctNotReachableEventClear 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 xx 31 2 2 This trap is sent when the RADIUS accounting server can be reached Table 82 SNMP IP Traps OPTIO
41. LEDs The following table describes the LEDs Table 3 LEDs LED COLOR STATUS DESCRIPTION PWR Green On The system is turned on Off The system is off SYS Green Blinking The system is rebooting and performing self diagnostic tests On The system is on and functioning properly Off The power is off or the system is not ready malfunctioning ALM Red On There is a hardware failure Off The system is functioning normally 1 8 Green Blinking The system is transmitting receiving to from a 10 Mbps Ethernet Ethernet network ids E On The link to a 10 Mbps Ethernet network is up 2108 F ES Amber Blinking The system is transmitting receiving to from a 100 Mbps 2108 G and Ethernet network ES 2108 LC On The link to a 100 Mbps Ethernet network is up Off The link to an Ethernet network is down 1 8 Green On The Switch is supplying power to the connected device that Ethernet supports PoE POM Off No device is connected to this port or the Switch is not only supplying power via the Ethernet cable Amber Blinking The system is transmitting receiving to from a 10 100 Mbps Ethernet network On The link to a 10 100 Mbps Ethernet network is up Off The link to an Ethernet network is down 100 1000 Green On The link to a 1000 Mbps Ethernet network is up Amber On The link to a 100 Mbps Ethernet network is up Off The link to an Ethernet network is down
42. MVR only responds to IGMP join and leave control messages from multicast groups that are configured under MVR Join and leave reports from other multicast groups are managed by IGMP snooping The following figure shows a network example The subscriber VLAN 1 2 and 3 information is hidden from the streaming media server S In addition the multicast VLAN information is only visible to the Switch and S Figure 77 MVR Network Example ES 2108 Series User s Guide Chapter 19 Multicast 19 6 1 Types of MVR Ports In MVR a source port is a port on the Switch that can send and receive multicast traffic in a multicast VLAN while a receiver port can only receive multicast data Once configured the Switch maintains a forwarding table that matches the multicast stream to the associated multicast group 19 6 2 MVR Modes You can set your Switch to operate in either dynamic or compatible mode In dynamic mode the Switch sends IGMP leave and join reports to the other multicast devices such as multicast routers or servers in the multicast VLAN This allows the multicast devices to update the multicast forwarding table to forward or not forward multicast traffic to the receiver ports In compatible mode the Switch does not send any IGMP reports In this case you must manually configure the forwarding settings on the multicast devices in the multicast VLAN 19 6 3 How MVR Works The following figure shows a multicast televisi
43. Modransk 621 143 01 Praha 4 Modrany Ceska Republika Denmark Support E mail support zyxel dk Sales E mail sales zyxel dk Telephone 45 39 55 07 00 Fax 45 39 55 07 07 Web www zyxel dk Regular Mail ZyXEL Communications A S Columbusvej 2860 Soeborg Denmark Finland Support E mail support zyxel fi Sales E mail sales zyxel fi Telephone 358 9 4780 8411 Fax 358 9 4780 8448 Web www zyxel fi Regular Mail ZyXEL Communications Oy Malminkaari 10 00700 Helsinki Finland France E mail info zyxel fr Telephone 33 4 72 52 97 97 Fax 33 4 72 52 19 20 Web www zyxel fr Regular Mail ZyXEL France 1 rue des Vergers Bat 1 C 69760 Limonest France Germany Support E mail support zyxel de Sales E mail sales zyxel de Telephone 49 2405 6909 69 Fax 49 2405 6909 99 Web www zyxel de Regular Mail ZyXEL Deutschland GmbH Adenauerstr 20 A2 D 52146 Wuerselen Germany Hungary Support E mail support 9 zyxel hu Sales E mail info 9 zyxel hu Telephone 36 1 3361649 Fax 36 1 3259100 Web www zyxel hu Regular Mail ZyXEL Hungary 48 Zoldlomb Str H 1025 Budapest Hungary 272 ES 2108 Series User s Guide Appendix D Customer Support India Support E mail support zyxel in Sales E mail sales zyxel in Telephone 91 11 30888144 to 91 11 30888153 Fax 91 11 30888149 91 11 26810715 Web http www zyxel in Regular Mail India ZyXEL Technology Indi
44. Overload protection Specification 100 240 VAC 50 60 Hz 0 5 A maximum DC Model Power Overload protection Specification 12 V DC 0 65 A maximum The power wires should be at least 18 AWG American Wire Gauge AWG is a measurement system that specifies the thickness of wire The thicker the wire the smaller the AWG number Use a standard 2 5 mm jack plug The DC power plug should match the following specifications the measurements are in millimeters Figure 156 DC Power Plug ES 2108 Series User s Guide Appendix A Product Specifications Table 103 Hardware Specifications Fast Ethernet Interface Eight 10 100 Base TX interfaces Auto negotiation Auto MDI MDIX Compliant with IEEE 802 3 802 3u Back pressure flow control for half duplex mode Flow control for full duplex IEEE 802 3x RJ 45 Ethernet cable connector Rate limiting at 64Kbps steps The ES 2108PWR has 8 IEEE 802 3af Power over Ethernet compliant Ethernet Ports maximum 15 4 Watt port 123 2 Watt system 100 Mbps SFP Interface ES 2108 F Only Fast Ethernet SFP open slot for transceiver of 100BASE FX 100BASE LX or 100BASE BX Gigabit Interface One Gigabit Ethernet mini GBIC slot ES 2108 G and ES 2108PWR only One mini GBIC slot and one Gigabit 100 Base FX fiber optic port ES 2108 LC only Compliant with 802 32 802 3ab 802 3u Copper fiber interface auto selection by signal detection fiber first LEDs Per Switch
45. Select this option to enable loop guard on the Switch The Switch generates syslog internal log messages as well as SNMP traps when it shuts down a port via the loop guard feature Port This field displays a port number ES 2108 Series User s Guide Chapter 22 Loop Guard Table 64 Advanced Application gt Loop Guard continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Use this row to make the setting the same for all ports Use this row first and then make adjustments on a port by port basis Note Changes in this row are copied to all the ports as soon as you make them Active Select this check box to enable the loop guard feature on this port The Switch sends probe packets from this port to check if the Switch it is connected to is in loop state If the Switch that this port is connected is in loop state the Switch will shut down this port Clear this check box to disable the loop guard feature Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh ES 2108 Series User s Guide PART IV IP Application Static Route 181 Differentiated Services 185 DHCP 189 Static Route This chapter shows yo
46. Setup screen Accounting Use this section to configure accounting settings on the Switch Update Period This is the amount of time in minutes before the Switch sends an update to the accounting server This is only valid if you select the start stop option for the Exec or Dot1x entries Type The Switch supports the following types of events to be sent to the accounting server s System Configure the Switch to send information when the following system events occur system boots up system shuts down system accounting is enabled system accounting is disabled e Exec Configure the Switch to send information when an administrator logs in and logs out via the console port telnet or SSH Dot1x Configure the Switch to send information when an IEEE 802 1x client begins a session authenticates via the Switch ends a session as well as interim updates of a session Commands Configure the Switch to send information when commands of specified privilege level and higher are executed on the Switch Active Select this to activate accounting for a specified event types Broadcast Select this to have the Switch send accounting information to all configured accounting servers at the same time If you don t select this and you have two accounting servers set up then the Switch sends information to the first accounting server and if it doesn t get a response from the accounting server then it tries the seco
47. Source Guard The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 62 Advanced Application gt IP Source Guard gt ARP Inspection gt Configure gt Port LABEL DESCRIPTION Port This field displays the port number If you configure the port the settings are applied to all of the ports Trusted State Select whether this port is a trusted port Trusted or an untrusted port Untrusted The Switch does not discard ARP packets on trusted ports for any reason The Switch discards ARP packets on untrusted ports if the sender s information in the ARP packet does not match any of the current bindings Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click this to reset the values in this screen to their last saved values 21 5 2 ARP Inspection VLAN Configure Use this screen to enable ARP inspection on each VLAN and to specify when the Switch generates log messages for receiving ARP packets from each VLAN To open this screen click Advanced Application gt IP Source Guard gt ARP Inspection gt Configure gt VLAN Figure 97 Advanced Application gt IP Source Guard gt ARP Inspection gt Configure gt VLAN VID OFA eee VLAN Configure VLAN Co
48. Switch ES 2108 Series User s Guide Chapter 4 The Web Configurator Figure 23 Resetting the Switch Via the Console Port ES 2108 G Bootbase Version V1 01 09 02 2005 14 00 16 RAM Size 32768 Kbytes DRAM POST Testing 32768K OK FLASH AMD 32M 1 ZyNOS Version V3 80 ABL 0 b2 05 28 2007 20 18 03 Press any key to enter debug mode within 3 seconds Enter Debug Mode ras atlc Starting XMODEM upload CRC mode CECECCECCECC Total 49152 bytes received ras gt atgo The Switch is now re initialized with the factory default configuration file including the default password of 1234 4 7 Logging Out of the Web Configurator Click Logout in a screen to exit the web configurator You have to log in with your password again after you log out This is recommended after you finish a management session both for security reasons and so as you don t lock out other administrators Figure 24 Web Configurator Logout Screen Thank you for using the Web Configurator Please close the browser before next login Goodbye 4 8 Help The web configurator s online help has descriptions of individual screens and some supplementary information Click the Help link from a web configurator screen to view an online help description of that screen ES 2108 Series User s Guide 59 Chapter 4 The Web Configurator ES 2108 Series User s Guide Initial Setup Example This
49. This key must be the same on the external RADIUS accounting server and the Switch Delete Check this box if you want to remove an existing RADIUS accounting server entry from the Switch This entry is deleted when you click Apply Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh 20 2 2 TACACS Server Setup Use this screen to configure your TACACS server settings See Section 20 1 2 on page 152 for more information on TACACS servers Click on the TACACS Server Setup link in the Authentication and Accounting screen to view the screen as shown ES 2108 Series User s Guide Chapter 20 Authentication amp Accounting Figure 88 Advanced Application gt Auth and Acct gt TACACS Server Setup ED TACACS Server SetuP NEP Auth and Acct Authentication Server Mode index priority Timeout 30 seconds Index IP Address TCP Port Shared Secret Delete t Du L amp ll LL M e 0 beo f ptr Apply Cancel Accounting Server Timeout 30 seconds Index IP Address TCP Port Shared Secret Delete 1 oo f o heo o Se Apply Cancel The following table describes the labels in t
50. User s Guide Chapter 24 Differentiated Services Table 66 IP Application gt DiffServ continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Settings in this row apply to all ports Use this row only if you want to make some settings the same for all ports Use this row first to set the common settings and then make adjustments on a port by port basis Note Changes in this row are copied to all the ports as soon as you make them Active Select this option to enable DiffServ on the port Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to start configuring this screen again 24 3 DSCP to IEEE802 1p Priority Mapping Settings You can configure the DSCP to IEEE802 1p mapping to allow the Switch to prioritize all traffic based on the incoming DSCP value according to the DiffServ to IEEE802 1p mapping table The following table shows the default DSCP to IEEE802 1P mapping Table 67 DSCP VALUE 0 7 8 15 16 283 24 31 32 39 40 47 48 55 56 63 IEEE802 1P O 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 24 3 1 Configuring DSCP Settings Use this screen to change the DSCP IEEE 802 1p mapping click the DSCP Setting link in the DiffServ screen to display the screen as shown next
51. User s Guide 33 Chapter 1 Getting to Know Your Switch Figure 4 Tag based VLAN Application a a VLAN 2 1 1 1 4 2 VLAN Shared Server Example Shared resources such as a server can be used by all ports in the same VLAN as the server as shown in the following example In this example only ports that need access to the server need belong to VLAN 1 Ports can belong to other VLAN groups too Figure 5 Shared Server Using VLAN Example H VLAN 1 VLAN 2 rA d i ES os Ta AES E B quce 1 2 Ways to Manage the Switch Use any of the following methods to manage the Switch Web Configurator This is recommended for everyday management of the Switch using a supported web browser See Chapter 4 on page 51 Command Line Interface Line commands offer an alternative to the Web Configurator and may be necessary to configure advanced features See the CLI Reference Guide FTP Use File Transfer Protocol for firmware upgrades and configuration backup restore See Section 26 8 on page 200 SNMP The device can be monitored and or managed by an SNMP manager See Section 27 3 on page 204 ES 2108 Series User s Guide Chapter 1 Getting to Know Your Switch 1 3 Good Habits for Managing the Switch Do the following things regularly to make the Switch more secure and to manage the Switch more effectively Change the passwo
52. VLAN group Click the number to edit the VLAN settings Active This field indicates whether the VLAN settings are enabled Yes or disabled No Name This field displays the descriptive name for this VLAN group Delete Click Delete to remove the selected entry from the summary table Cancel Click Cancel to clear the Delete check boxes 8 5 4 Configure VLAN Port Settings Use the VLAN Port Setting screen to configure the static VLAN IEEE 802 1Q settings on a port See Section 8 5 on page 89 for more information on static VLAN Click the VLAN Port Setting link in the VLAN Status screen ES 2108 Series User s Guide Chapter 8 VLAN Figure 44 Advanced Application gt VLAN gt VLAN Port Setting ED VLAN Port Settna NEN VLAN Status GVRP Dr Port isolation O Ingress Check O Port PVID GVRP Acceptable Frame Type VLAN Trunking NENNEN z ai s r u sj D 2 NEN r u a D D ars D ff al D 5 p r u sj r 6 ho A m 7 OoOo ja v m NEN r Al 9 NENNEN Al r Apply Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 18 Advanced Application gt VLAN gt VLAN Port Setting LABEL DESCRIPTION GVRP GVRP GARP VLAN Registration Protocol is a registration protocol that defines a way for switches to register necessary VLAN members on ports across the network Select this check box to perm
53. and accounting servers Figure 85 AAA Server Client AAA Server 20 1 1 Local User Accounts By storing user profiles locally on the Switch your Switch is able to authenticate and authorize users without interacting with a network AAA server However there is a limit on the number of users you may authenticate in this way See Chapter 27 on page 203 ES 2108 Series User s Guide 151 Chapter 20 Authentication amp Accounting 20 1 2 RADIUS and TACACS RADIUS and TACACS are security protocols used to authenticate users by means of an external server instead of or in addition to an internal device user database that is limited to the memory capacity of the device In essence RADIUS and TACACS authentication both allow you to validate an unlimited number of users from a central location The following table describes some key differences between RADIUS and TACACS4 Table 48 RADIUS vs TACACS RADIUS TACACS Transport UDP User Datagram Protocol TCP Transmission Control Protocol Protocol Encryption Encrypts the password sent for All communication between the client the authentication Switch and the TACACS server is encrypted 20 2 Authentication and Accounting Screens To enable authentication accounting or both on the Switch First configure your authentication server settings RADIUS TACACS or both and then set up the authentication priority and accounting settings Click Ad
54. are connected to is a member of Management VLAN Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to reset the fields to your previous configuration Management Configure the fields to set additional management IP address IP Addresses IP Address Enter the IP address for managing the Switch by the members of the VLAN specified in the VID field below IP Subnet Enter the IP subnet mask in dotted decimal notation For example 255 255 255 0 Mask VID Enter the VLAN identification number Default Enter the IP address of the default outgoing gateway in dotted decimal notation for Gateway example 192 168 1 254 Add Click Add to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to reset the fields to your previous configuration Index This field displays the index number of an entry IP Address This field displays the management IP address of the Switch IP Subnet This field displays the subnet mask of the Switch Mask VID This field
55. button to clear all Switch configuration information you configured and Default return to the factory defaults Note All custom configuration will be lost If you want to access the Switch web configurator again you may need to change the IP address of your computer to be in the same subnet as that of the default Switch IP address 192 168 1 1 ES 2108 Series User s Guide Chapter 26 Maintenance Table 73 Management gt Maintenance continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Save Click Config 1 to save the Switch s current configuration to non volatile memory Configuration Reboot System Click Config 1 to restart the Switch without physically turning the power off Note Make sure to click the Save button in any screen to save your settings to the current configuration on the Switch 26 2 Load Factory Default Follow the steps below to reset the Switch back to the factory defaults 1 Inthe Maintenance screen click the Click Here button next to Load Factory Default to clear all Switch configuration information you configured and return to the factory defaults The following message appears Figure 117 Load Factory Default Confirmation Microsoft Internet Explorer E x 2 Are you sure you want to load factory default 3 Cancel 2 Click OK to begin resetting all Switch configurations to the factory defaults and then wait for the Switch to restart 3 Inthe web configurator click the Sa
56. cccticctcsiesciednngnciccaniotaaseomina sade t DII CUM Faces REP EdE E SS 67 Foute 31 Sialic Port Betas ES eR AG iiur inaianei iana a AE cda daa da dion add 68 Figure 32 Basic Setting gt System Info ES PTOBPWIEPI coiccssiccetsissscceseicaiencasaussearanstdastesanulecatesnersasenreeiads 72 Figure 33 Basic Setting gt System Info ES 2108 G oie rated reet iae inina NNER 72 Figure 34 Basic Setting Ge eral Setup auususeudate senkt ctu t radix dur Ear RR E SR ouai dua Eb x neue iad 74 avtsesdrctiebe urvEcE esl c 76 Figure 26 Basic Seiling s IP See Lsoscpparonen erbt er pp a d tou Pe Pe e a pid ee Ere ERR EE 79 Figure 37 Basic Setting gt Port Setup ES 21OS PWR esssssiteecixase nebbia dense bn ta aded PE MV MERE erna inini 81 Figure 38 Basie Setting gt Por Setup TES E TUBE acenentcncen tect cients 82 ES 2108 Series User s Guide 21 List of Figures Foue a9 PO VLAN EAE ssstssesonzsnssstenaets take PROOF brra dates ops tasshd Rb gana uda bra patito P 89 Figure 40 Switch Setup Select V LEN Type auuisassectnsiinddicedres iini aki dum iana aana aaa RaT d 89 Figure 41 Advanced Application gt VLAN VLAN Status ssesesesssssssserssressrrrsssrssrressresssrsnessnnssenneennnns 90 Figure 42 Advanced Application gt VLAN gt VLAN Detail seeeseeeeenenn enne 90 Figure 43 Advanced Application gt VLAN gt Static VLAN ssesssssssssseseseenneeen nnne ntn nnne 91 Figure 44 Advanced Application gt VLAN
57. chapter introduces and shows you how to configure the broadcast storm control feature 13 1 Broadcast Storm Control Setup Broadcast storm control limits the number of broadcast frames that can be stored in the Switch buffer or sent out from the Switch Broadcast frames that arrive when the buffer is full are discarded Enable this feature to reduce broadcast traffic coming into your network Click Advanced Application gt Broadcast Storm Control in the navigation panel to display the screen as shown next Figure 60 Advanced Application gt Broadcast Storm Control OL EES Active Port Active Rate i m Kbps 1 a l4 Kbps 2 Dn 4 Kbps 3 E a Kbps 4 Ci a2 Kbps 5 C eao Kbps 6 C eao Kbps 7 z C Kbps 8 Li 4 kbps 9 ea keps Apply Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 30 Advanced Application Broadcast Storm Control LABEL DESCRIPTION Active Select this check box to enable broadcast storm control on the Switch Clear this check box to disable the feature Port This field displays a port number ES 2108 Series User s Guide Chapter 13 Broadcast Storm Control Table 30 Advanced Application gt Broadcast Storm Control continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Settings in this row apply to all ports Use this row only if you want to make some settings the same for all ports Use this row first t
58. chapter shows how to set up the Switch for an example network 5 1 Overview The following lists the configuration steps for the initial setup Create a VLAN e Set port VLAN ID Configure the IP management address 5 1 1 Creating a VLAN VLANs confine broadcast frames to the VLAN group in which the port s belongs You can do this with port based VLAN or tagged static VLAN with fixed port members In this example you want to configure port 5 as a member of VLAN 2 Figure 25 Initial Setup Network Example VLAN N Intemet I e Seeeeseeseeesesesseeeeseee ES 2108 Series User s Guide Chapter 5 Initial Setup Example 1 Click Advanced Application gt VLAN in the navigation panel and click the Static VLAN link OME VLAN Port Setting Static VLAN The Number of VLAN 2 Index VID Elapsed Time Status 1 1 0 03 21 Static 2 2 0 03 21 Static Change Pages Previous Next 2 Inthe Static VLAN JGECTAUCUNEEEED pen screen select ACTIVE Vv ACTIVE enter a Ha SIET descriptive name in the AN Grup pe Name field and enter 2 in the VLAN Group Port Control Tagging ID field for the x v TxTagging VLAN2 network 1 Norma C Fixed C Forbidden M TxTauging Norma amp Norma 2 3 4 Norma C Fixed C Forbidden lv TxTauging 6 Norma 7 Norma 8 Norma 9 Norma C Forbidden M Tx Tagging Forbidden M Tx Tagging C Fixed C Fixed C Fixed C Forbidden M TxTagging
59. following figure ES 2108 Series User s Guide Chapter 27 Access Control 1 HTTPS connection requests from an SSL aware web browser go to port 443 by default on the Switch s WS web server 2 HTTP connection requests from a web browser go to port 80 by default on the Switch s WS web server Figure 129 HTTPS Implementation WS ug 80 HTTPS HTTP BES If you disable HTTP in the Service Access Control screen then the Switch blocks all HTTP connection attempts 27 9 HTTPS Example If you haven t changed the default HTTPS port on the Switch then in your browser enter https Switch IP Address as the web site address where Switch IP Address is the IP address or domain name of the Switch 27 9 1 Internet Explorer Warning Messages When you attempt to access the Switch HTTPS server a Windows dialog box pops up asking if you trust the server certificate Click View Certificate if you want to verify that the certificate is from the Switch You see the following Security Alert screen in Internet Explorer Select Yes to proceed to the web configurator login screen if you select No then web configurator access is blocked ES 2108 Series User s Guide Chapter 27 Access Control Figure 130 Security Alert Dialog Box Internet Explorer Do Security Alert X changed by others However there is a problem with the site s ran Information you exchange with this site cannot
60. marked as Elapsed Time This field shows how long it has been since a normal VLAN was registered or a static VLAN was set up Status This field shows how this VLAN was added to the Switch dynamic using GVRP static added as a permanent entry or it shows other added using Multicast VLAN Registration MVR 8 5 3 Configure a Static VLAN Use this screen to configure and view 802 1Q VLAN parameters for the Switch See Section 8 5 on page 89 for more information on static VLAN To configure a static VLAN click Static VLAN in the VLAN Status screen to display the screen as shown next Figure 43 Advanced Application gt VLAN gt Static VLAN E Static VLAN g VLAN Status ACTIVE Vv Name EXAMPLE VLAN Group ID 2 Port Control Tagging x v T Tagging 1 Norma C Fixed C Forbidden M TxTagging 2 Norma C Fixed C Forbidden v TxTagging 3 Norma C Fixed C Forbidden M TxTaaging 4 Norma C Fixed C Forbidden M TxTagging 5 C Norma Fixed C Forbidden Tx Taaging B Norma C Fixed C Forbidden M TxTagging 7 Norma C Fixed C Forbidden M TxTagging 8 Norma C Fixed C Forbidden v TxTagging g Norma C Fixed C Forbidden M TxTagging Add Cancel Clear VID Active Name Delete 1 Yes 1 ri Delete Cancel ES 2108 Series User s Guide Chapter 8 VLAN The following table describes the related labels in this screen Table 17 Advanced Application gt VLAN gt Static VLAN LABEL DE
61. networking devices are also known as hosts Subnet masks determine the maximum number of possible hosts on a network You can also use subnet masks to divide one network into multiple sub networks Introduction to IP Addresses One part of the IP address is the network number and the other part is the host ID In the same way that houses on a street share a common street name the hosts on a network share a common network number Similarly as each house has its own house number each host on the network has its own unique identifying number the host ID Routers use the network number to send packets to the correct network while the host ID determines to which host on the network the packets are delivered Structure An IP address is made up of four parts written in dotted decimal notation for example 192 168 1 1 Each of these four parts is known as an octet An octet is an eight digit binary number for example 11000000 which is 192 in decimal notation Therefore each octet has a possible range of 00000000 to 11111111 in binary or 0 to 255 in decimal The following figure shows an example IP address in which the first three octets 192 168 1 are the network number and the fourth octet 16 is the host ID ES 2108 Series User s Guide 257 Appendix B IP Addresses and Subnetting Figure 158 Network Number and Host ID 192 168 1 16 at i a i i i M I mmmh i i L L i L I L I i I L I L I
62. of Service QoS is used to prioritize source to destination traffic flows All packets in the flow are given the same priority You can use CoS class of service to give different priorities to different packet types DiffServ is a class of service CoS model that marks packets so that they receive specific per hop treatment at DiffServ compliant network devices along the route based on the application types and traffic flow Packets are marked with DiffServ Code Points DSCPs indicating the level of service desired This allows the intermediary DiffServ compliant network devices to handle the packets differently depending on the code points without the need to negotiate paths or remember state information for every flow In addition applications do not have to request a particular service or give advanced notice of where the traffic is going 24 1 1 DSCP and Per Hop Behavior DiffServ defines a new DS Differentiated Services field to replace the Type of Service ToS field in the IP header The DS field contains a 2 bit unused field and a 6 bit DSCP field which can define up to 64 service levels The following figure illustrates the DS field DSCP is backward compatible with the three precedence bits in the ToS octet so that non DiffServ compliant ToS enabled network device will not conflict with the DSCP mapping Figure 105 DiffServ Differentiated Service Field DSCP 6 bits DS 2 bits The DSCP value determines the
63. of bridge priority plus MAC address This ID is the same for Root and Our Bridge if the Switch is the root switch Hello Time This is the time interval in seconds at which the root switch transmits a second configuration message Max Age second This is the maximum time in seconds a switch can wait without receiving a configuration message before attempting to reconfigure ES 2108 Series User s Guide Chapter 11 Spanning Tree Protocol Table 28 Advanced Application gt Spanning Tree Protocol Status MSTP continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Forwarding Delay second This is the time in seconds the root switch will wait before changing states that is listening to learning to forwarding Cost to Bridge This is the path cost from the root port on this Switch to the root switch Port ID This is the priority and number of the port on the Switch through which this Switch must communicate with the root of the Spanning Tree Configuration Name This field displays the configuration name for this MST region Revision Number This field displays the revision number for this MST region Configuration Digest A configuration digest is generated from the VLAN MSTI mapping information This field displays the 16 octet signature that is included in an MSTP BPDU This field displays the digest when MSTP is activated on the system Topology Changed Times This is the number of
64. only When the highest priority queue empties traffic on the next highest priority queue begins Q3 has the highest priority and QO the lowest The default queuing method is Strictly Priority Weighted Round Robin Scheduling WRR services queues on a rotating basis based on their queue weight the number you configure in the queue Weight field Queues with larger weights get more service than queues with smaller weights Note When you select SPQ it applies to Q3 only with priority over all other queues QO Q2 will use Weighted Round Robin Weight When you select Weighted Round Robin Scheduling use the drop down list boxes to choose queue weights 1 15 Bandwidth is divided across the different traffic queues according to their weights Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh ES 2108 Series User s Guide Multicast This chapter shows you how to configure various multicast features 19 1 Multicast Overview Traditionally IP packets are transmitted in one of either two ways Unicast 1 sender to 1 recipient or Broadcast 1 sender to everybody on the network Multicast delivers IP packets to just a group of h
65. or ports under the Destination label These are the ports Port which are going to have the same attributes as the source port You can enter individual ports separated by a comma or a range of ports by using a dash Example 2 4 6 indicates that ports 2 4 and 6 are the destination ports 2 6 indicates that ports 2 through 6 are the destination ports Basic Setting Select which port settings you configured in the Basic Setting menus should be copied to the destination port s Advanced Select which port settings you configured in the Advanced Application menus Application should be copied to the destination ports Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to reset the fields ES 2108 Series User s Guide PART VI Troubleshooting and Appendices Troubleshooting 241 Product Specifications 281 IP Addresses and Subnetting 257 Legal Information 267 Customer Support 271 Index 277 Troubleshooting This chapter covers potential problems and possible remedies 34 1 Problems Starting Up the Switch Table 100 Troubleshooting the Start Up of Your Switch PROBLEM CORRECTIVE ACTION None of the LEDs Check the power connection
66. port number 91 port settings 92 port based 77 port based VLAN 94 static VLAN 91 status 90 91 tagged 87 trunking 89 type 77 89 VLAN Virtual Local Area Network 75 VLAN number 80 VLAN trunking 93 VSA 159 W wall mounting 39 warranty 268 note 269 web configurator 34 default IP address 51 features 54 getting help 59 home 52 lockout 57 login 51 logout 59 navigation panel 53 screen summary 54 status 52 system information 71 WRR 135 Z ZyNOS ZyXEL Network Operating System 201 ES 2108 Series User s Guide
67. possible hosts a host ID of all zeroes is the subnet s address itself all ones is the subnet s broadcast address 192 168 1 0 with mask 255 255 255 128 is subnet A itself and 192 168 1 127 with mask 255 255 255 128 is its broadcast address Therefore the lowest IP address that can be assigned to an actual host for subnet A is 192 168 1 1 and the highest is 192 168 1 126 Similarly the host ID range for subnet B is 192 168 1 129 to 192 168 1 254 Example Four Subnets The previous example illustrated using a 25 bit subnet mask to divide a 24 bit address into two subnets Similarly to divide a 24 bit address into four subnets you need to borrow two host ID bits to give four possible combinations 00 01 10 and 11 The subnet mask is 26 bits 11111111 11111111 11111111 11000000 or 255 255 255 192 Each subnet contains 6 host ID bits giving 26 2 or 62 hosts for each subnet a host ID of all zeroes is the subnet itself all ones is the subnet s broadcast address Table 111 Subnet 1 IP SUBNET MASK NETWORK NUMBER LAST OCTET BIT VALUE IP Address Decimal 192 168 1 0 IP Address Binary 11000000 10101000 00000001 00000000 Subnet Mask Binary 11111111 11111111 11111111 11000000 Subnet Address Lowest Host ID 192 168 1 1 192 168 1 0 Broadcast Address Highest Host ID 192 168 1 62 192 168 1 63 ES 2108 Series User s Guide Appendix B IP Addresses and Subnetting Table 11
68. rubber feet 37 transceiver installation 44 transceiver removal 45 ventilation 37 38 39 wall mounting 39 hardware installation 37 freestanding 37 precautions 38 rack mounting 38 wall mounting 39 hello time 111 help web configurator 59 hops 111 HTTPS 215 example 216 humidity 250 IANA 264 IEEE 802 1p 77 IEEE 802 1x activate 128 154 156 reauthentication 129 IEEE 802 1x port authentication 127 IGMP version 137 IGMP Internet Group Management Protocol 137 IGMP filtering 137 profile 142 profiles 139 IGMP snooping 137 MVR 143 ingress port 96 installation See hardware installation Internet setting up your browser 244 Internet Assigned Numbers Authority See IANA 264 introduction 31 IP address default 51 IP interface 78 IP setup 78 IP source guard 165 ARP inspection 165 static bindings 165 J Java permissions 246 L LACP 121 system priority 124 timeout 125 layer 2 features 253 LEDs 47 link aggregation 121 dynamic 121 ID information 122 setup 123 124 status 122 Link Aggregation Control Protocol LACP 121 lockout 57 login 51 account 211 administrator account 211 non administrator account 212 number of accounts 211 password 56 212 logs 221 loop guard 175 how it works 176 port shut down 177 probe packet 176 loop guard vs STP 175 MAC Media Access Control 72 MAC address 72 235 ES 2108 Series User s Guide 279 Index learning 77 131 132 learning limi
69. s Latch Example 2 Pull the transceiver out of the slot Figure 17 Transceiver Removal Example 3 1 5 100 Base FX Fiber Optic Port This 100 Base FX fiber optic port is only available on the ES 2108 LC gt To avoid possible eye injury do not look directly into a module s fiber optic connectors Keep the dust cover on a fiber optic module until you connect it ES 2108 Series User s Guide Chapter 3 Hardware Overview You may need to clean the fiber optic cable s connectors with a cotton swab dipped in alcohol Type Fiber optic e Wavelength 1310 50 nm Multi mode Dual LC connectors Connection distance Up to 2km 3 2 Rear Panel The following figure shows the rear panel of the Switch The power receptacle is on the rear panel Figure 18 Rear Panel AC Model Figure 19 Rear Panel DC Model 3 2 1 Power Connections Make sure you are using the correct power source as shown on the Switch s panel To connect the power to the AC powered version of the Switch insert the female end of power cord to the power receptacle on the rear panel Connect the other end of the supplied power cord to the power source To connect the power to the DC powered version of the Switch insert the female end of power adaptor s cord into the power receptacle on the rear panel Connect the power adaptor to an appropriate power source ES 2108 Series User s Guide Chapter 3 Hardware Overview 3 3
70. settings Server Mode This field is only valid if you configure multiple RADIUS servers Select index priority and the Switch tries to authenticate with the first configured RADIUS server if the RADIUS server does not respond then the Switch tries to authenticate with the second RADIUS server Select round robin to alternate between the RADIUS servers that it sends authentication requests to Timeout Specify the amount of time in seconds that the Switch waits for an authentication request response from the RADIUS server If you are using index priority for your authentication and you are using two RADIUS servers then the timeout value is divided between the two RADIUS servers For example if you set the timeout value to 30 seconds then the Switch waits for a response from the first RADIUS server for 15 seconds and then tries the second RADIUS server Index This is a read only number representing a RADIUS server entry IP Address Enter the IP address of an external RADIUS server in dotted decimal notation UDP Port The default port of a RADIUS server for authentication is 1812 You need not change this value unless your network administrator instructs you to do so Shared Secret Specify a password up to 32 alphanumeric characters as the key to be shared between the external RADIUS server and the Switch This key is not sent over the Switch ES 2108 Series User s Guide network This key must be the s
71. shown next See Section 11 1 4 on page 103 for more information on MSTP 112 ES 2108 Series User s Guide Chapter 11 Spanning Tree Protocol BES This screen is only available after you activate MSTP on the Switch Figure 58 Advanced Application gt Spanning Tree Protocol Status MSTP EXT ESE Configuration RSTP MSTP Spanning Tree Protocol MSTP CST Bridge Root Our Bridge Bridge ID 0000 000000000000 8000 000000000000 Hello Time second 0 2 Max Age second 0 20 Forwarding Delay second 0 15 Cost to Bridge 0 D Port ID Ox0000 Ox0000 Configuration Name 001349000001 Revision Number 0 Configuration Digest A317523DB32DA2D62 Topology Changed Times 0 Time Since Last Change D Instance Instance VLAN 0 1 4094 MSTI 1 7 Bridge Regional Root Our Bridge Bridge ID 0000 000000000000 8001 000000000000 Internal Cost 0 0 Port ID 0x0000 0x0000 The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 28 Advanced Application gt Spanning Tree Protocol Status MSTP LABEL DESCRIPTION Configuration Click Configuration to specify which STP mode you want to activate Click MSTP to edit MSTP settings on the Switch CST This section describes the Common Spanning Tree settings Bridge Root refers to the base of the spanning tree the root bridge Our Bridge is this Switch This Switch may also be the root bridge Bridge ID This is the unique identifier for this bridge consisting
72. shows the number of packets including bad packets received that were between 128 and 255 octets in length 256 511 This field shows the number of packets including bad packets received that were between 256 and 511 octets in length 512 1023 This field shows the number of packets including bad packets received that were between 512 and 1023 octets in length 1024 1518 This field shows the number of packets including bad packets received that were between 1024 and 1518 octets in length Giant This field shows the number of packets dropped because they were bigger than the maximum frame size ES 2108 Series User s Guide Basic Setting This chapter describes how to configure the System Info General Setup Switch Setup IP Setup and Port Setup screens 7 1 Overview The System Info screen displays general Switch information such as firmware version number and hardware polling information such as fan speeds The General Setup screen allows you to configure general Switch identification information The General Setup screen also allows you to set the system time manually or get the current time and date from an external server when you turn on your Switch The real time is then displayed in the Switch logs The Switch Setup screen allows you to set up and configure global Switch features The IP Setup screen allows you to configure a management IP address subnet mask s and DNS domain name server for managemen
73. snooping IGMP snooping for up to 16 VLANs VLAN Port based VLAN setting Tag based IEEE 802 1Q VLAN Number of VLAN 4K 1000 static maximum Supports GVRP Port Aggregation Supports IEEE 802 3ad static and dynamic LACP port trunking Two groups up to four ports each Port mirroring All ports support port mirroring Bandwidth control Supports rate limiting at 64K increment Security IEEE 802 1x port based authentication Static MAC address filtering Limiting number of dynamic addresses per port ES 2108 Series User s Guide Appendix A Product Specifications The following list which is not exhaustive illustrates the standards supported in the Switch Table 106 Standards Supported STANDARD DESCRIPTION RFC 826 Address Resolution Protocol ARP RFC 867 Daytime Protocol RFC 868 Time Protocol RFC 894 Ethernet II Encapsulation RFC 1112 IGMP v1 RFC 1155 SMI RFC 1157 SNMPv1 Simple Network Management Protocol version 1 RFC 1213 SNMP MIB II RFC 1305 Network Time Protocol NTP version 3 RFC 1441 SNMPv2 Simple Network Management Protocol version 2 RFC 1493 Bridge MIBs RFC 1643 Ethernet MIBs RFC 1757 RMON RFC 1901 SNMPv2c Simple Network Management Protocol version 2c RFC 2131 RFC 2132 Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol DHCP RFC 2138 RADIUS Remote Authenti
74. the Internet E zone Medium Blocks third party cookies that do not have a compact privacy policy Blocks third party cookies that use personally identifiable CJ information without your implicit consent Restricts first party cookies that use personally identifiable information without implicit consent Pop up Blocker S Prevent most pop up windows from appearing Block pop ups Settings 3 Type the IP address of your device the web page that you do not want to have blocked with the prefix http For example http 192 168 1 1 4 Click Add to move the IP address to the list of Allowed sites Figure 151 Pop up Blocker Settings Pop up Blocker Settings Exceptions Pop ups are currently blocked You can allow pop ups from specific Web sites by adding the site to the list below Address of Web site to allow http 192 168 1 1 Add Allowed sites Notifications and Filter Level Play a sound when a pop up is blocked Show Information Bar when a pop up is blocked Filter Level Medium Block most automatic pop ups v Close 5 Click Close to return to the Privacy screen Pop up Blocker FAG ES 2108 Series User s Guide Chapter 34 Troubleshooting 6 Click Apply to save this setting 34 2 1 2 JavaScripts If pages of the web configurator do not display properly in Internet Explorer check that JavaScripts are allowed 1 In Internet Explorer clic
75. the M3 flat head screws through the mounting bracket holes into the Switch 3 Repeat steps 1 and 2 to install the second mounting bracket on the other side of the Switch 4 You may now mount the Switch on a rack Proceed to the next section ES 2108 Series User s Guide Chapter 2 Hardware Installation and Connection 2 2 3 Mounting the Switch on a Rack 1 Position a mounting bracket that is already attached to the Switch on one side of the rack lining up the two screw holes on the bracket with the screw holes on the side of the rack Figure 8 Mounting the Switch on a Rack oOoooooo Hooooooooo DO OOO O OD O p Oooooo oOoooooo oY D DDO D OD QNU 2 Using a 2 Phillips screwdriver install the M5 flat head screws through the mounting bracket holes into the rack 3 Repeat steps and 2 to attach the second mounting bracket on the other side of the rack 2 3 Wall mounting Installation Do the following to hang your Switch on a wall BES See Appendix A on page 249 for the size of screws not included to use and how far apart to place them 1 Locate a high position on wall that is free of obstructions Use a sturdy wall gt Do NOT block the ventilation holes Make sure that no objects obstruct the airflow of the fans ES 2108 Series User s Guide Chapter 2 Hardware Installation and Connection 2 Drill two holes for the screws not included M
76. the multicast group ES 2108 Series User s Guide Chapter 19 Multicast Table 47 Advanced Application gt Multicast gt Multicast Setting gt MVR gt Group Configuration LABEL DESCRIPTION End Address This field displays the ending IP address of the multicast group Delete ALL Select Delete All and click Delete to remove all entries from the table Delete Select Delete Group and click Delete to remove the selected entry ies from the table Cancel Select Cancel to clear the check box es in the table 19 8 1 MVR Configuration Example The following figure shows a network example where ports 1 2 and 3 on the Switch belong to VLAN 1 In addition port 7 belongs to the multicast group with VID 200 to receive multicast traffic the News and Movie channels from the remote streaming media server S Computers A B and C in VLAN 1 are able to receive the traffic Figure 81 MVR Configuration Example e 1 News 224 1 4 10 224 1 4 50 Multicast VID 200 movie 230 1 2 50 230 1 2 60 To configure the MVR settings on the Switch create a multicast group in the MVR screen and set the receiver and source ports ES 2108 Series User s Guide Chapter 19 Multicast Figure 82 MVR Configuration Example OLY iD Multicast Setting Group Configuration lv Name Premium Multicast VLAN ID 200 802 1p Priority o Dynamic C Compatible
77. these slots for fiber optic connections to backbone Slot Ethernet switches ES 2108PWR Power over The 8 10 100 Mbps RJ 45 Ethernet ports are compliant with the IEEE 802 3af power Ethernet over Ethernet standard 3 1 1 Console Port For local management you can use a computer with terminal emulation software configured to the following parameters e VT100 terminal emulation e 9600 bps e No parity 8 data bits 1 stop bit e No flow control Connect the male 9 pin end of the console cable to the console port of the Switch Connect the female end to a serial port COM1 COM2 or other COM port of your computer 3 1 2 Ethernet Ports The Switch has Eight 10 100Mbps auto negotiating auto crossover Ethernet ports In 10 100Mbps Fast Ethernet the speed can be 10Mbps or 100Mbps and the duplex mode can be half duplex or full duplex The ES 2108 G and ES 2108PWR also come with a Gigabit mini GBIC slot each The mini GBIC slot has priority over the Gigabit port This means that if the mini GBIC slot and the corresponding Gigabit port are connected at the same time the Gigabit port will be disabled The speed of the Gigabit Ethernet mini GBIC slot can be 100Mbps or 1000Mbps and the duplex mode can be half duplex at 100 Mbps or full duplex An auto negotiating port can detect and adjust to the optimum Ethernet speed 10 100Mpbs and duplex mode full duplex or half duplex of the connected device An auto crossover auto MDI MD
78. this screen Table 13 Basic Setting gt Port Setup LABEL DESCRIPTION Settings in this row apply to all ports Use this row only if you want to make some settings the same for all ports Use this row first to set the common settings and then make adjustments on a port by port basis Note Changes in this row are copied to all the ports as soon as you make them Port This is the port index number Active Select this check box to enable a port The factory default for all ports is enabled A port must be enabled for data transmission to occur Name Enter a descriptive name that identifies this port You can enter up to 64 alpha numerical characters Note Due to space limitation the port name may be truncated in some web configurator screens Type This field displays 10 100M for an Ethernet connection and 10 100 1000M for the Gigabit Ethernet mini GBIC slots and 100M for a 100 base FX fiber optic port on the ES 2108 LC or a Fast Ethernet SFP transceiver connection on the ES 2108 F ES 2108 Series User s Guide Chapter 7 Basic Setting Table 13 Basic Setting gt Port Setup continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Speed Duplex Select the speed and the duplex mode of the Ethernet connection on this port For Ethernet ports select Auto 10M Half Duplex 10M Full Duplex 100M Half Duplex or 100M Full Duplex For the Gigabit Ethernet mini GBIC slot select Auto 10M H
79. through a RADIUS server Select tacacs to have the Switch authenticate the administrator accounts through a TACACS server ES 2108 Series User s Guide Chapter 20 Authentication amp Accounting Table 51 Advanced Application gt Auth and Acct gt Auth and Acct Setup continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Login These fields specify which database the Switch should use first second and third to authenticate administrator accounts users for Switch management Configure the local user accounts in the Access Control gt Logins screen The TACACS and RADIUS are external servers Before you specify the priority make sure you have set up the corresponding database correctly first You can specify up to three methods for the Switch to authenticate administrator accounts The Switch checks the methods in the order you configure them first Method 1 then Method 2 and finally Method 3 You must configure the settings in the Method 1 field If you want the Switch to check other sources for administrator accounts specify them in Method 2 and Method 3 fields Select local to have the Switch check the administrator accounts configured in the Access Control gt Logins screen Select radius to have the Switch check the administrator accounts via RADIUS servers configured in the RADIUS Server Setup screen Select tacacs to have the Switch check the administrator accounts via TACACS servers configured in the TACACS Server
80. throughout the network from the device that generates the topology change In STP a longer delay is required as the device that causes a topology change first notifies the root bridge that then notifies the network Both RSTP and STP flush unwanted learned addresses from the filtering database In RSTP the port states are Discarding Learning and Forwarding In this user s guide STP refers to both STP and RSTP 11 1 1 STP Terminology The root bridge is the base of the spanning tree ES 2108 Series User s Guide Chapter 11 Spanning Tree Protocol Path cost is the cost of transmitting a frame onto a LAN through that port The recommended cost is assigned according to the speed of the link to which a port is attached The slower the media the higher the cost Table 22 STP Path Costs LINK RECOMMENDED RECOMMENDED ALLOWED SPEED VALUE RANGE RANGE Path 4Mbps 250 100 to 1000 1 to 65535 Cost Path 10Mbps 100 50 to 600 1 to 65535 Cost Path 16Mbps 62 40 to 400 1 to 65535 Cost Path 100Mbps 19 10 to 60 1 to 65535 Cost Path 1Gbps 4 3 to 10 1 to 65535 Cost Path 10Gbps 2 1to5 1 to 65535 Cost On each bridge the root port is the port through which this bridge communicates with the root It is the port on this Switch with the lowest path cost to the root the root path cost If there is no root port then this Switch has been accepted as the root bridge of the spanning tree netwo
81. time it receives an ARP packet from the VLAN Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click this to reset the values in this screen to their last saved values ES 2108 Series User s Guide Loop Guard This chapter shows you how to configure the Switch to guard against loops on the edge of your network 22 1 Loop Guard Overview Loop guard allows you to configure the Switch to shut down a port if it detects that packets sent out on that port loop back to the Switch While you can use Spanning Tree Protocol STP to prevent loops in the core of your network STP cannot prevent loops that occur on the edge of your network Figure 98 Loop Guard vs STP Loop Guard wmm mmmmmmmm mo GR Ee MuR EUN RN AR RN RE RU p t n n n t Rn m mt t n UR RAN D Loop guard is designed to handle loop problems on the edge of your network This can occur when a port is connected to a Switch that is in a loop state Loop state occurs as a result of human error It happens when two ports on a switch are connected with the same cable When a switch in loop state sends out broadcast messages the messa
82. times the spanning tree has been reconfigured Time Since Last Change This is the time since the spanning tree was last reconfigured Instance These fields display the MSTI to VLAN mapping In other words which VLANs run on each spanning tree instance Instance This field displays the MSTI ID VLAN This field displays which VLANs are mapped to an MSTI MSTI Select the MST instance settings you want to view Bridge Root refers to the base of the MST instance Our Bridge is this Switch This Switch may also be the root bridge Bridge ID This is the unique identifier for this bridge consisting of bridge priority plus MAC address This ID is the same for Root and Our Bridge if the Switch is the root switch Internal Cost This is the path cost from the root port in this MST instance to the regional root switch Port ID This is the priority and number of the port on the Switch through which this Switch must communicate with the root of the MST instance ES 2108 Series User s Guide This chapter shows you how you can cap the maximum bandwidth using the Bandwidth Control screen 12 1 Bandwidth Control Setup Bandwidth control means defining a maximum allowable bandwidth for incoming and or out going traffic flows on a port Click Advanced Application gt Bandwidth Control in the navigation panel to bring up the screen as shown next Bandwidth Control Figure 59 Advance
83. unauthorized ARP packet The Switch automatically deletes the MAC address filter afterwards Enter 0 if you want the MAC address filter to be permanent Log Profile Log buffer size Enter the maximum number 1 1024 of log messages that were generated by ARP packets and have not been sent to the syslog server yet Make sure this number is appropriate for the specified Syslog rate and Log interval If the number of log messages in the Switch exceeds this number the Switch stops recording log messages and simply starts counting the number of entries that were dropped due to unavailable buffer Click Clearing log status table in the ARP Inspection Log Status screen to clear the log and reset this counter See Section 21 4 1 on page 169 ES 2108 Series User s Guide Chapter 21 IP Source Guard Table 61 Advanced Application gt IP Source Guard gt ARP Inspection gt Configure continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Syslog rate Enter the maximum number of syslog messages the Switch can send to the syslog server in one batch This number is expressed as a rate because the batch frequency is determined by the Log Interval You must configure the syslog server Chapter 29 on page 223 to use this Enter 0 if you do not want the Switch to send log messages generated by ARP packets to the syslog server The relationship between Syslog rate and Log interval is illustrated in the following examples 4 invalid
84. up to 64 printable characters spaces are allowed Location Enter the geographic location up to 32 characters of your Switch Contact Person s Name Enter the name up to 32 characters of the person in charge of this Switch Use Time Server when Bootup Enter the time service protocol that your timeserver uses Not all time servers support all protocols so you may have to use trial and error to find a protocol that works The main differences between them are the time format When you select the Daytime RFC 867 format the Switch displays the day month year and time with no time zone adjustment When you use this format it is recommended that you use a Daytime timeserver within your geographical time zone Time RFC 868 format displays a 4 byte integer giving the total number of seconds since 1970 1 1 at 0 0 0 NTP RFC 1305 is similar to Time RFC 868 None is the default value Enter the time manually Each time you turn on the Switch the time and date will be reset to 1970 1 1 0 0 0 Time Server IP Address Enter the IP address of your timeserver The Switch searches for the timeserver for up to 60 seconds If you select a timeserver that is unreachable then this screen will appear locked for 60 seconds Please wait Current Time This field displays the time you open this menu or refresh the menu New Time hh min ss Enter the new time in hour minute and second format The new
85. without notice Trademarks ZyNOS ZyXEL Network Operating System is a registered trademark of ZyXEL Communications Inc Other trademarks mentioned in this publication are used for identification purposes only and may be properties of their respective owners Certifications Federal Communications Commission FCC Interference Statement This device complies with Part 15 of FCC rules Operation is subject to the following two conditions This device may not cause harmful interference This device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operations ES 2108 Series User s Guide 267 Appendix C Legal Information FCC Warning This device has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital switch pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a commercial environment This device generates uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual may cause harmful interference to radio communications Operation of this device in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference in which case the user will be required to correct the interference at his own expense CE Mark Warning This is a class A product In a domestic environment this product may cause radio interference in which case the user may be requir
86. your computer s IP address must match it Refer to the chapter on access control for details Your computer s and the Switch s IP addresses must be on the same subnet See the following section to check that pop up windows JavaScripts and Java permissions are allowed ES 2108 Series User s Guide Chapter 34 Troubleshooting 34 2 1 Pop up Windows JavaScripts and Java Permissions In order to use the web configurator you need to allow Web browser pop up windows from your device JavaScripts enabled by default Java permissions enabled by default BS Internet Explorer 6 screens are used here Screens for other Internet Explorer versions may vary 34 2 1 1 Internet Explorer Pop up Blockers You may have to disable pop up blocking to log into your device Either disable pop up blocking enabled by default in Windows XP SP Service Pack 2 or allow pop up blocking and create an exception for your device s IP address 34 2 1 1 1 Disable pop up Blockers 1 In Internet Explorer select Tools Pop up Blocker and then select Turn Off Pop up Blocker Figure 148 Pop up Blocker Tools Mail and News gt Pop up Blocker Turn Off Pop up Blocker Manage Add ons Pop up Blocker Settings Synchronize oe ot I Windows Update Windows Messenger Internet Options You can also check if pop up blocking is disabled in the Pop up Blocker section in the Privacy tab 1 In Internet Exp
87. 0 0 24 bits por o 16777214 16 bits 255 255 0 0 16 bits 215 45 65534 24 bits 255 255 255 0 8 bits 26 9 254 29 bits 255 255 255 248 3 bits 23 2 6 Notation Since the mask is always a continuous number of ones beginning from the left followed by a continuous number of zeros for the remainder of the 32 bit mask you can simply specify the number of ones instead of writing the value of each octet This is usually specified by writing a followed by the number of bits in the mask after the address For example 192 1 1 0 25 is equivalent to saying 192 1 1 0 with subnet mask 255 255 255 128 The following table shows some possible subnet masks using both notations Table 110 Alternative Subnet Mask Notation ALTERNATIVE LASTOCTET LAST OCTET SUBNET MASK NOTATION BINARY DECIMAL 255 255 255 0 24 0000 0000 0 255 255 255 128 25 1000 0000 128 ES 2108 Series User s Guide Appendix B IP Addresses and Subnetting Table 110 Alternative Subnet Mask Notation continued SUBNETMASK NOTATION BINARY DECIMAL 255 255 255 192 26 1100 0000 192 255 255 255 224 27 1110 0000 224 255 255 255 240 28 1111 0000 240 255 255 255 248 29 1111 1000 248 255 255 255 252 30 1111 1100 252 Subnetting You can use subnetting to divide one network into multiple sub networks In the following example a network administrator cre
88. 0 0 6 0 0 0 S 0 0 0 The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 8 Status Port Details LABEL DESCRIPTION Port Info Name This field shows the name of the port Link This field shows whether the Ethernet connection is down and the speed duplex mode Status If STP Spanning Tree Protocol is enabled this field displays the STP state of the port see Section 11 1 3 on page 103 for more information If STP is disabled this field displays FORWARDING if the link is up otherwise it displays STOP PD PowerConsu mption W PWR model Only This field is only available on the PWR model but not available for the Gigabit and mini GBIC slots This field shows the power consumption of the powered device connected to the port ES 2108 Series User s Guide Chapter 6 System Status and Port Statistics Table 8 Status Port Details continued LABEL DESCRIPTION PD This field is only available on the PWR model but not available for the Gigabit and MaxCurrent mini GBIC slots mA This field shows the maximum current a powered device can get from the Switch If PWR model the powered device s power consumption exceeds the maximum power offered by the Only Switch the Switch stops sending power The Switch can provide up to 351 36mA current to one PD connected to each 10 100Mbps Ethernet port and up to a total of 12
89. 1 YY M 99 10 1 Comioure a Fitamg RUE LUS 99 Chapter 11 Spanning Tree PVCU 101 ASSP SRR REI EUST 101 ga a Mea ME qute EU EM 101 ela How DTP WORS ee ts caeentieiuaddananddeueede teeta a 102 AV Ue IF PON SES cuu datugesndcastsenidar vot oddktiaed btt dE teaaia ate Fo RE oS Y e du 103 UEMELR Ius ccpit R eo aameemmetae 103 11 2 Spanning Tree Protocol Status SGEE isis te rc pnt aa bL RO Ra C RF ROG 106 ES 2108 Series User s Guide 13 Table of Contents 11 9 SATIN Noe CONIOUISEO orsstsscntienia acaba ecdesia doge aoo Rd 106 11 4 Configure Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol auissesae eie eierkrasex one ani ear beds baa 107 1S Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol SIGHS caeieciet nere Reni eeiam te ie i pie heute Deeds 108 11 5 Configure Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol esie rct reet hne ert ntt nn 109 11 7 Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol Status ceret retain aree eta Y nar Pese nS S oneri aun 112 Chapter 12 Ll ge 115 px gcns Conn SE aias aS NT EE 115 Chapter 13 ilar we lg Di oos nn EE a AEs aaraa ea 117 13 1 Broadcast Storm Control Setup sirere ee eine 117 Chapter 14 es 119 DE Pon ee BUS dropped oaebdegid ache ar app pape n ap cn 119 Chapter 15 Link ooo HH 121 15 1 Link CCT i Rer 121 19 2 Dynami Lank Aggrega
90. 108 Series User s Guide Chapter 25 DHCP 25 3 3 Global DHCP Relay Configuration Example The follow figure shows a network example where the Switch is used to relay DHCP requests for the VLAN1 and VLAN2 domains There is only one DHCP server that services the DHCP clients in both domains Figure 111 Global DHCP Relay Network Example b DHCP Server B 7 192 168 1 100 iil S k on D L LI 1 Li LI 1 1 J LI LI 1 LI Configure the DHCP Relay screen as shown Make sure you select the Option 82 check box to set the Switch to send additional information such as the VLAN ID together with the DHCP requests to the DHCP server This allows the DHCP server to assign the appropriate IP address according to the VLAN ID Figure 112 DHCP Relay Configuration Example ED DHCP Relay g Status Active Vv Remote DHCP Server 1 fi 92 168 1 100 Remote DHCP Server 2 0 0 0 0 Remote DHCP Server 3 0 0 0 0 Relay Agent Information M Option 82 Information M ES 2108 G Apply Cancel 25 4 Configuring DHCP VLAN Settings Use this screen to configure your DHCP settings based on the VLAN domain of the DHCP clients Click IP Application gt DHCP in the navigation panel then click the VLAN link In the DHCP Status screen that displays ES 2108 Series User s Guide Chapter 25 DHCP You must set up a management IP address for each VLAN that you want to configure DHCP settings for on th
91. 11 1 4 4 Common and Internal Spanning Tree CIST A CIST represents the connectivity of the entire network and it is equivalent to a spanning tree in an STP RSTP The CIST is the default MST instance MSTID 0 Any VLANs that are not members of an MST instance are members of the CIST In an MSTP enabled network there is only one CIST that runs between MST regions and single spanning tree devices A network may contain multiple MST regions and other network segments running RSTP Figure 52 MSTP and Legacy RSTP Network Example Region 3 Region 2 Physical Connection RSTP on the Link ES 2108 Series User s Guide Chapter 11 Spanning Tree Protocol 11 2 Spanning Tree Protocol Status Screen The Spanning Tree Protocol status screen changes depending on what standard you choose to implement on your network Click Advanced Application gt Spanning Tree Protocol to see the screen as shown Figure 53 Advanced Application gt Spanning Tree Protocol _ Spanning Tree Protocol Status Configuration RSTP MSTP Spanning Tree Protocol RSTP Bridge Root Our Bridge Bridge ID 0000 000000000000 0000 d00000000000 Hello Time second 0 0 Max Age second 0 0 Forwarding Delay second 0 0 Cost to Bridge 0 Port ID 0x0000 Topology Changed Times 0 Time Since Last Change 0 00 00 This screen differs depending on which STP mode RSTP or MSTP you configure on the Switch This screen is described in detail in the section that fo
92. 113 Figure 59 Advanced Application gt Bandwidth Control nennen 115 Figure 60 Advanced Application gt Broadcast Storm Control 117 Figure 61 Advanced Application Mirroring uaecccssuees cederet eb na i ibn eoo cede x nns cud en c 119 Figure 62 Advanced Application gt Link Aggregation Status ssssssssseeen 122 Figure 63 Advanced Application gt Link Aggregation gt Link Aggregation Setting 123 Figure 64 Advanced Application gt Link Aggregation gt Link Aggregation Setting gt LACP 124 Figure 65 Trunking Example Physical Connections accesos retro eret n Ecc etus rhe sp reus a 125 Figure 66 Trunking Example Configuration Screen sessssssssseeeeeeen een 126 Figure OF IEEE 802 Ix Authentication FYOCESS seveseditteveNddsc tici vidas tes dud dna Eel Y vv din pU DUdd dc EbL Qul dd oq dE 128 Figure 68 Advanced Application gt Port Authentication eeeeesessssseeeesseeereeennn nens 128 Figure 69 Advanced Application gt Port Authentication gt 802 1X eessseeene 129 Figure 70 Advanced Application Part Security cauussesssecakt unit pete Ea eer GRET ep deep aa Eee ORBE EEUU 132 Foue f 1 Por Seca Example arriari a deoa eot Maio pal eben mani iata aet Up ab Ao 133 Figure 72 Advanced Application gt Queuing Method ssssssssseseseseseenneee entente 136 Figure 73 Advanced Application gt M
93. 145 configuration example 148 group configuration 146 how it works 144 modes 144 network example 143 ports 144 MVR Multicast VLAN Registration 143 N NAT 264 navigation 54 navigation panel 53 network management system NMS 204 NTP RFC 1305 74 O overview 31 P password 56 changing 56 problems 247 password cluster member 232 PHB Per Hop Behavior 185 ping 221 pop up Windows allowing 242 ES 2108 Series User s Guide Index port authentication 127 and RADIUS 152 IEEE802 1x 128 154 156 port cloning 237 238 advanced settings 237 238 basic settings 237 238 port details 66 port isolation 93 96 port mirroring 119 253 port redundancy 121 port security 131 limit MAC address learning 132 setup 177 port setup 80 port speed duplex 83 port status 65 port VLAN trunking 89 port based VLAN 77 94 all connected 96 port isolation 96 setting wizard 96 ports standby 121 and MVR 144 details 43 power connector 46 power specification 249 priority 77 priority level 77 priority queue assignment 77 product registration 269 PVID 87 93 PVID Priority Frame 87 Q QoS 253 queue weight 136 queuing 135 queuing algorithm 135 136 queuing method 135 136 R rack mounting 38 RADIUS 152 advantages 152 and authentication 152 Network example 151 server 152 settings 152 setup 152 Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol See RSTP 101 rear panel 46 registration product
94. 2 Subnet 2 LAST OCTET BIT IP SUBNET MASK NETWORK NUMBER VALUE IP Address 192 168 1 64 IP Address Binary 11000000 10101000 00000001 01000000 Subnet Mask Binary 11111111 11111111 11111111 11000000 Subnet Address 192 168 1 64 Lowest Host ID 192 168 1 65 Broadcast Address 192 168 1 127 Highest Host ID 192 168 1 126 Table 113 Subnet 3 IP SUBNET MASK NETWORK NUMBER aU ere ao IP Address 192 168 1 128 IP Address Binary 11000000 10101000 00000001 10000000 Subnet Mask Binary 11111111 11111111 11111111 11000000 Subnet Address 192 168 1 128 Lowest Host ID 192 168 1 129 Broadcast Address 192 168 1 191 Highest Host ID 192 168 1 190 Table 114 Subnet 4 IP SUBNET MASK NETWORK NUMBER E UE UTE IP Address 192 168 1 192 IP Address Binary 11000000 10101000 00000001 11000000 Subnet Mask Binary 11111111 11111111 11111111 11000000 Subnet Address 192 168 1 192 Lowest Host ID 192 168 1 193 Broadcast Address 192 168 1 255 Highest Host ID 192 168 1 254 Example Eight Subnets Similarly use a 27 bit mask to create eight subnets 000 001 010 011 100 101 110 and 111 The following table shows IP address last octet values for each subnet Table 115 Eight Subnets suoner SUBNET mmsraopness HAST ess BRGADGAST 1 0 1 30 31 2 32 33 62 63 3 64 65 94 95 4 96 97 126 12
95. 3 2W power to all PDs connected to the Switch PD This field shows the maximum power the Switch can provide through this port MaxPower mW PWR model Only LACP This field shows if LACP is enabled on this port or not TxPkts This field shows the number of transmitted frames on this port RxPkts This field shows the number of received frames on this port Errors This field shows the number of received errors on this port Tx KB s This field shows the number kilobytes per second transmitted on this port Rx KB s This field shows the number of kilobytes per second received on this port Up Time This field shows the total amount of time the connection has been up Tx Packet The following fields display detailed information about packets transmitted TX Packets This field shows the number of good packets unicast multicast and broadcast transmitted Multicast This field shows the number of good multicast packets transmitted Broadcast This field shows the number of good broadcast packets transmitted Pause This field shows the number of 802 3x Pause packets transmitted Rx Packet The following fields display detailed information about packets received RX Packets This field shows the number of good packets unicast multicast and broadcast received Multicast This field shows the number of good multicast packets received Broadcast This field shows the number of good broadcast packets received Pa
96. 38 Configuring Statie ROUNO sireisas onson otia kae rub ER a d koe abus Ra ER D EE 181 Chapter 24 DiHerentiated Servis ME A t 185 c mp Ee cmm 185 243 1 DSCP and Per Hop Bela auuissniua i opa Er ei adl kk oq Rub Hara Ex au rad 185 24 12 Difioer Newoik Example amt 185 LS RD DISBIS air A RA 186 24 3 DSCP to IEEE802 1p Priority Mapping Settings sssssessssssssssssrssssrsssssesrssssssessssessssees 187 2431 Conig rig DSC P Seinge mom 187 Chapter 25 189 OWNEI LEPE 1j MEC NTENUM 189 Pak DHCF Ui ene TT 189 251 2 DHGP Coniguraton CDUDE 2 5 eorr gd Papog t aded da tea bcd va n ada rp tree 189 gas DENISE auickuoiadcxasx bati scti dci tential a o Gd Ea d Rut Fail Cut GU d 189 293 DHCP Relay e soci aaniedaaen ondeae saqancnedadausanicteiccaseteesenecsantieas 190 25 5 1 DHCP Relay Agent IntormaligI 225 urcxes oret tt ratore md d naa cac ed 190 25 3 2 Configuring DHCP Global Relay 5iucvssscetidasbe e uadestecudtist Feiti dag e Rise bes ed ou b epedS 191 25 3 3 Global DHCP Relay Configuration Example uices epe insana 192 25 4 Configuring DHCP VLAN Selle ausus ttt nnt nein ea i ani 192 25 4 1 Example DHCP Relay for Two VLAMS ins s ccscssctesssscana costccgenenseucsaetncesacceseceascsneress 194 ES 2108 Series User s Guide Table of Contents Part ALL jl eo 195 Chapter 26 MaAiMeNaAN E
97. 5 12 ES 2108 Series User s Guide Table of Contents PO eec MM RR UNUM 76 OE NE A err rr rcm 78 7 6 1 Management E pi ci ccccsssctscsccrsnrseteds cdebenedsdurbncereessaebendeedienteedsburinnairamamuadrts 78 Tg PO OBRID uosebndeboa e vn bene rea NDS ee n SU Md lus Li AN 80 Fart li Advanced Selt scii 85 Chapter 8 MIAN E E E A A I E P 87 8 1 Introduction to IEEE 802 10 Tagged VLAN aues secedere daba aerea ne 87 8 1 1 Forwarding Tagged and Untagged Frames 2e rrr rere berti 87 Hc Autona VLAN Regislrellgl ooskar ai IS AE ERM YEA RR A E DIS RM UR RERO E ERP RIS 88 cer i a ER 88 BAZ OVRI 88 Da Pe LOT CUNY cies T bobus ien nuls bd as Ecc bases cost ddE bn D das bebe Dd aree E aue GIU 89 E rope mus d eb ce ulasuet ces tucesbeeed nese S 89 mlt ro VEAN T 89 Sa E VEAN SIBI 2xussncuuiqosac cxt xbleteop rte team RE ERE UG domain Fun Ca EY e ur 90 EUR ataie VLAN Ear MC CT 90 Boo Copiau State VLAN assedpaiporsa cin cada Epic oct a PU agant ena Ee 91 554 Coniigure VLAN Pori SGHIDUS oeneussetecrisiste escis Fberuiidabb ia E uda ia 92 BpoPoIBaDd VLAN SEIN adssditvoscu tette denm edt e ent ecol Ra ce E apt eU REM ES 94 9 5 1 Configure amp Porn based VLAN sacco nutus Eu ui RU Eus ER aUud uda ER ex dE Ea ER 94 Chapter 9 ci c 97 BOT CEIVED rm 97 us Configuring State MAG Forwarding cceiseuerieniianintieadianeeiad DUE a DOR phot 97 Chapter 10 1
98. 52 Index setup 156 authorization privilege levels 158 automatic VLAN registration 88 AWG 249 bandwidth control 253 basic settings 71 binding 165 binding table 165 building 165 block from accessing 57 BPDUS Bridge Protocol Data Units 102 Bridge Protocol Data Units BPDUs 102 bridging 253 broadcast storm control 117 browser configuration 242 C certifications 267 notices 268 viewing 268 CFI Canonical Format Indicator 87 changing password 56 CIST 105 CIST Common and Internal Spanning Tree 103 Class of Service CoS 185 cloning a port See port cloning cluster management 227 manager 227 231 member 227 231 member firmware upgrade 230 network example 227 setup 230 specification 227 status 228 switch models 227 VID 231 web configurator 229 command interface 34 ES 2108 Series User s Guide 277 Index 278 Common and Internal Spanning Tree CIST 103 Common and Internal Spanning Tree See CIST 105 configuration restore 58 saving 57 configuration file 58 backup 200 restore 58 199 configuration default 58 console port reset 58 settings 43 contact information 271 copying port settings See port cloning copyright 267 CPU management port 94 CRC Cyclic Redundant Check 70 current date 75 current time 74 customer support 271 D daylight saving time 75 debug mode 58 default configuration 58 DHCP 189 251 configuration options 189 modes 189 relay agent 189 relay example 194
99. 7 ES 2108 Series User s Guide Appendix B IP Addresses and Subnetting Table 115 Eight Subnets continued suener SUBNET mmsraooness MAST egg BROADGAST 5 128 129 158 159 6 160 161 190 191 7 192 193 222 223 8 224 225 254 255 Subnet Planning The following table is a summary for subnet planning on a network with a 24 bit network number Table 116 24 bit Network Number Subnet Planning NO BORROWED SUBNET MASK HOST BITS NO SUBNETS SUBNET 1 255 255 255 128 25 2 126 2 255 255 255 192 26 4 62 3 255 255 255 224 27 8 30 4 255 255 255 240 28 16 14 5 255 255 255 248 29 32 6 6 255 255 255 252 30 64 2 7 255 255 255 254 31 128 1 The following table is a summary for subnet planning on a network with a 16 bit network number Table 117 16 bit Network Number Subnet Planning NO RORROWED SUBNET MASK NO SUBNETS NO HOSTS PER 1 255 255 128 0 17 32766 2 255 255 192 0 18 16382 3 255 255 224 0 19 8190 4 255 255 240 0 20 16 4094 5 255 255 248 0 21 32 2046 6 255 255 252 0 22 64 1022 7 255 255 254 0 23 128 510 8 255 255 255 0 24 256 254 9 255 255 255 128 25 512 126 10 255 255 255 192 26 1024 62 11 255 255 255 224 27 2048 30 12 255 255 255 240 28 4096 14 13 255 255 255 248 29 8192 6 E
100. 7 6 How SSH works The following table summarizes how a secure connection is established between two remote hosts ES 2108 Series User s Guide 213 Chapter 27 Access Control Figure 127 How SSH Works Internet Ns Y yotion method to use 1 Host Identification The SSH client sends a connection request to the SSH server The server identifies itself with a host key The client encrypts a randomly generated session key with the host key and server key and sends the result back to the server The client automatically saves any new server public keys In subsequent connections the server public key is checked against the saved version on the client computer 2 Encryption Method Once the identification is verified both the client and server must agree on the type of encryption method to use 3 Authentication and Data Transmission After the identification is verified and data encryption activated a secure tunnel is established between the client and the server The client then sends its authentication information user name and password to the server to log in to the server 27 7 SSH Implementation on the Switch Your Switch supports SSH version 2 using RSA authentication and three encryption methods DES 3DES and Blowfish The SSH server is implemented on the Switch for remote management and file transfer on port 22 Only one SSH connection is allowed at a time 27 7 1 Requirements for Using SSH You mus
101. 8 VLAN Table 18 Advanced Application gt VLAN gt VLAN Port Setting continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to start configuring the screen again 8 6 Port Based VLAN Setup Port based VLANs are VLANs where the packet forwarding decision is based on the destination MAC address and its associated port Port based VLANs require allowed outgoing ports to be defined for each port Therefore if you wish to allow two subscriber ports to talk to each other for example between conference rooms in a hotel you must define the egress an egress port is an outgoing port that is a port through which a data packet leaves for both ports Port based VLANs are specific only to the device on which they were created When you activate port based VLAN the Switch uses a default VLAN ID of 1 You cannot change it In screens such as IP Setup and Filtering that require a VID you must enter as the VID The port based VLAN setup screen is shown next The CPU management port forms a VLAN with all Ethernet ports 8 6 1 Configure a Port based VLAN Select Port Based as the VLAN Type in the Switch Setup screen see Figure 40 on page 89 and t
102. 8 bits of the mask are ones and the remaining 24 bits are zeroes ES 2108 Series User s Guide Appendix B IP Addresses and Subnetting Subnet masks are expressed in dotted decimal notation just like IP addresses The following examples show the binary and decimal notation for 8 bit 16 bit 24 bit and 29 bit subnet masks Table 108 Subnet Masks BINARY DECIMAL OCTET OCTET OCTET 4TH OCTET 8 bit mask 11111111 00000000 00000000 00000000 255 0 0 0 16 bit mask 11111111 11111111 00000000 00000000 255 255 0 0 24 bit mask 11111111 11111111 11111111 00000000 255 255 255 0 29 bit mask 11111111 11111111 11111111 11111000 255 255 255 248 Network Size The size of the network number determines the maximum number of possible hosts you can have on your network The larger the number of network number bits the smaller the number of remaining host ID bits An IP address with host IDs of all zeros 1s the IP address of the network 192 168 1 0 with a 24 bit subnet mask for example An IP address with host IDs of all ones is the broadcast address for that network 192 168 1 255 with a 24 bit subnet mask for example As these two IP addresses cannot be used for individual hosts calculate the maximum number of possible hosts in a network as follows Table 109 Maximum Host Numbers SUBNET MASK HOST ID SIZE MAXIMUM NUMBER OF HOSTS 8 bits 255 0
103. ARP packets per second Syslog rate is 5 Log interval is 1 the Switch sends 4 syslog messages every second 6 invalid ARP packets per second Syslog rate is 5 Log interval is 2 the Switch sends 10 syslog messages every 2 seconds Log interval Enter how often 1 86400 seconds the Switch sends a batch of syslog messages to the syslog server Enter 0 if you want the Switch to send syslog messages immediately See Syslog rate for an example of the relationship between Syslog rate and Log interval Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click this to reset the values in this screen to their last saved values 21 5 1 ARP Inspection Port Configure Use this screen to specify whether ports are trusted or untrusted ports for ARP inspection To open this screen click Advanced Application gt IP Source Guard gt ARP Inspection gt Configure gt Port Figure 96 Advanced Application gt IP Source Guard gt ARP Inspection gt Configure gt Port OFS NP Configure Port Trusted State Untrusted 1 Untrusted v 2 Untrusted 3 Untrusted 4 Untrusted 5 Untrusted 6 Untrusted 7 Untrusted DAC ES 2108 Series User s Guide Chapter 21 IP
104. Basic Setting gt IP Setup to open the following screen Use this screen to configure the default gateway device the default domain name server and add management IP addresses 7 6 1 Management IP Addresses The Switch needs an IP address for it to be managed over the network The factory default IP address is 192 168 1 1 The subnet mask specifies the network number portion of an IP address The factory default subnet mask is 255 255 255 0 You can configure up to 64 IP addresses which are used to access and manage the Switch from the ports belonging to the pre defined VLAN s BS You must configure a VLAN first ES 2108 Series User s Guide Chapter 7 Basic Setting Figure 36 Basic Setting gt IP Setup OES aD Domain Name Server 0 0 0 0 Default ManagementIP DHCP Client Address Static IP Address IP Address 32168124 IP Subnet Mask 255 255 255 0 Default Gateway foooo VID f Apply Cancel Management IP Addresses IP Address ooo IP Subnet Mask oon VID t 5 Default Gateway foooo Add Cancel Index IP Address IP Subnet Mask VID Default Gateway Delete Delete Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 12 Basic Setting gt IP Setup LABEL DESCRIPTION Domain DNS Domain Name System is for mapping a domain name to its corresponding IP Name Server address and vice versa Enter a domain name server IP address in or
105. C Fixed C Forbidden V TxTauging C Fixed C Forbidden M TxTauging C Fixed C Forbidden M TxTauging Add Cancel Clear Name Delete 1 rH Delete Cancel screen refer to the same VLAN ID The VLAN Group ID field in this screen and the VID field in the IP Setup 3 Since the VLAN2 network is connected to port 5 on the Switch select Fixed to configure port 5 to be a permanent member of the VLAN only 4 To ensure that VLAN unaware devices such as computers and hubs can receive frames properly clear the TX Tagging check box to set the Switch to remove VLAN tags before sending 5 Click Add to save the settings to the run time memory Settings in the run time memory are lost when the Switch s power is turned off ES 2108 Series User s Guide Chapter 5 Initial Setup Example 5 1 2 Setting Port VID Use PVID to add a tag to incoming untagged frames received on that port so that the frames are forwarded to the VLAN group that the tag defines In the example network configure 2 as the port VID on port 5 so that any untagged frames received on that port get sent to VLAN 2 Figure 26 Initial Setup Network Example Port VID gt 5 N Intemet Nae VLAN2 a ern a Click Advanced g E VLAN Fort Setting END VLAN Status Applications gt T E VLAN in the Port isolation EL navigation panel Ingress Check D Then click the VLA
106. C to copy incoming traffic to a specified MAC address on the mirrored port s Enter the destination MAC address in the fields provided Select Source MAC to copy incoming traffic from a specified MAC address on the mirrored port s Enter the source MAC address in the fields provided Egress You can specify to copy all outgoing traffic or traffic to from a specified MAC address Select All to copy all outgoing traffic from the mirrored port s Select Destination MAC to copy outgoing traffic to a specified MAC address on the mirrored port s Enter the destination MAC address in the fields provided Select Source MAC to copy outgoing traffic from a specified MAC address on the mirrored port s Enter the source MAC address in the fields provided Port This field displays the port number i Settings in this row apply to all ports Use this row only if you want to make some settings the same for all ports Use this row first to set the common settings and then make adjustments on a port by port basis Note Changes in this row are copied to all the ports as soon as you make them Mirrored Select this option to mirror the traffic on a port Direction Specify the direction of the traffic to mirror Choices are Egress outgoing Ingress incoming and Both Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to s
107. CORE ll suisia perenni enr dam uaa zc se Fase qa dead kt a ae fey ica Sac pro e P 41 Basic Configuration t 49 Hi 2i fentit 51 irre mri e T A E NE A TA TN 61 System Silane and Pert SraustioR ias es diedbtter uideret i dephebec qiosub beenden teu audite bas dta du Deer aat 65 Banie IDEE ss sah pcen cena Eie agp odd bru dta ater casa ped ditur ER tern eb st MERE 71 Advanced R 85 VLAN e 87 uae MAS OER ARMIES as cobarde aada aan Sa kaan 6d ea cinia doa deb Ea cO ceias nca af daa d 97 uuum M 99 cerni Wr Wurqns aiina A AN 101 rne sanani 115 Bocian ON COn erret ata nanpensiiaabonestaccaanmeadicamuepehiaae 117 JD ieri s ete te HP ETE 119 Lire dre a quseeaetreduldud Fe a dU etum tact DIE SSoFeldUiedU beet tiui D e Qd QR DE PUN E Lee Qa cuE D FRue aes 121 POr FUSCA T a aia ata 127 sce d aap een ene ene er a a rete Terr rrnT Tee 131 AUBIN NGI T E 135 POMS E ariaa gba adc n Rog anota acci erai dad vanes a 137 Athonicahon ws PIDEN UU OS SL EU 151 ogee ts ier E ER 165 LOON Es 113 MUN T T D D DLE TT 175 Ld P 179 ME HEATH MEDIE ETT STET 181 Diforentiatod SonicOS reraton enie Gb teer r der E Lr er abo de n Debe Ar Aai 185 pb ae TM TR EE 189 We
108. Cancel to reset the fields ES 2108 Series User s Guide Chapter 29 Syslog ES 2108 Series User s Guide This chapter introduces cluster management 30 1 Clustering Management Status Overview Cluster Management allows you to manage switches through one switch called the cluster manager The switches must be directly connected and be in the same VLAN group so as to be able to communicate with one another Table 93 ZyXEL Clustering Management Specifications Cluster Management Maximum number of cluster members 24 Cluster Member Models Must be compatible with ZyXEL cluster management implementation Cluster Manager The switch through which you manage the cluster member switches Cluster Members The switches being managed by the cluster manager switch In the following example switch A in the basement is the cluster manager and the other switches on the upper floors of the building are cluster members ES 2108 Series User s Guide 227 Chapter 30 Cluster Management Figure 139 Clustering Application Example 30 2 Clustering Management Status Click Management gt Cluster Management in the navigation panel to display the following screen BS A cluster can only have one manager Figure 140 Management gt Cluster Management Status q Management Status Configuration Status Manager Manager 00 a0 c5 d4 88 bf Index 1 2 The N
109. Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh 27 4 Setting Up Login Accounts Up to five people one administrator and four non administrators may access the Switch via web configurator at any one time e An administrator is someone who can both view and configure Switch changes The username for the Administrator is always admin The default administrator password is 1234 ES 2108 Series User s Guide 211 Chapter 27 Access Control LES It is highly recommended that you change the default administrator password 1234 e A non administrator username is something other than admin is someone who can view but not configure Switch settings Click Access Control from the navigation panel and then click Logins from this screen Figure 125 Management gt Access Control gt Logins ED Logins g Administrator Access Control Old Password New Password Retype to confirm Please record your new password whenever you change it The system will lock you out if you have forgotten your password Edit Logins Login User Name Password Retype to confirm T E a NEENMMMMN AM NENNEN a NEEEEEEEEEEEEN Apply Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 86 Management gt Access Control gt Logins LABEL DESCRIPTION Administrator This is the default administrator account with the admin user name You cannot change the default adminis
110. Commands C C stop only tacacs fo Auth and Acct Method 2 j Method 1 Method 3 local a local Apply Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 51 Advanced Application gt Auth and Acct gt Auth and Acct Setup LABEL DESCRIPTION Authentication Use this section to specify the methods used to authenticate users accessing the Switch Privilege Enable These fields specify which database the Switch should use first second and third to authenticate access privilege level for administrator accounts users for Switch management Configure the access privilege of accounts via commands see the CLI Reference Guide for local authentication The tacacs and radius are external servers Before you specify the priority make sure you have set up the corresponding database correctly first You can specify up to three methods for the Switch to authenticate the access privilege level of administrators The Switch checks the methods in the order you configure them first Method 1 then Method 2 and finally Method 3 You must configure the settings in the Method 1 field If you want the Switch to check other sources for access privilege level specify them in Method 2 and Method 3 fields Select local to have the Switch check the access privilege configured for local authentication Select radius to have the Switch authenticate the administrator accounts
111. DI Md 102 Tab 2 STP Pat SIBIBS serorea a eiue Pop FUR a aai qa Fe educa Pap dada XR 103 Table 24 Advanced Application gt Spanning Tree Protocol gt Configuration ssesssssss 106 Table 25 Advanced Application gt Spanning Tree Protocol gt RSTP ssssssssseee 107 Table 26 Advanced Application gt Spanning Tree Protocol Status RSTP ssssssssss 109 Table 27 Advanced Application gt Spanning Tree Protocol gt MSTP sene 111 Table 28 Advanced Application gt Spanning Tree Protocol Status MSTP sssssssees 113 Table 29 Advanced Application gt Bandwidth Control sseessssseseeeseeenneee ennt 115 Table 30 Advanced Application gt Broadcast Storm Control 117 Table 31 Advanced Application Mirroring usui eeepc trm reato prb det rabat 119 Table 32 Link Aggregation ID Local Swiich iussisti kro pce k kk DL RE EEHE COLERE REFOU R EtRF TE andanan DL ed RES q0 122 Table 33 Link Aggregation ID Peer Switely iiuieovvierni ran ci v aac cr aa Ca ER Ha e d c ra co aa 122 Table 34 Advanced Application gt Link Aggregation Status ssssssssssseeeene 122 Table 35 Advanced Application gt Link Aggregation gt Link Aggregation Setting 123 Table 36 Advanced Application gt Link Aggregation gt Link Aggregation Setting gt LACP 124 Table 37 Advanced Application gt Port
112. Down STOP Disabled 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 2 Down STOP Disabled 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 3 Down STOP Disabled 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 4 100M F FORWARDING Disabled 1793 1794 0 0 0 0 0 1 07 08 2 Down STOP Disabled 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 6 Down STOP Disabled 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 2 Down STOP Disabled 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 8 Down STOP Disabled 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 9 Down STOP Disabled 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 G Any Clear Counter C port Copyright 1995 vO by ZyXEL Communications 27 10 Service Port Access Control Service Access Control allows you to decide what services you may use to access the Switch You may also change the default service port and configure trusted computer s for each service in the Remote Management screen discussed later Click Access Control to go back to the main Access Control screen ES 2108 Series User s Guide Chapter 27 Access Control Figure 134 Management gt Access Control gt Service Access Control Service Access Control J Access Control Services Active Service Port Timeout Telnet v 3 SSH Iv 2 FTP e p HTTP Iv bo 3 Minutes HTTPS Iv 443 ICMP Vv SNMP Vv Apply PES The following table describes the fields in this screen Table 87 Management gt Access Control gt Service Access Control LABEL DESCRIPTION Services Services you may use to access the Switch are listed here Active Select this option for the corresponding serv
113. Down STOP Off Disabled 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 4 Down STOP off Disabled 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 5 100M F FORWARDING Off Disabled 2730 587 0 6 941 3 81 0 17 43 6 Down STOP Off Disabled 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 Fd Down STOP off Disabled 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 8 100M F FORWARDING Off Disabled 160 2320 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 58 9 Down STOP Disabled 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 ES 2108 Series User s Guide Chapter 6 System Status and Port Statistics Figure 29 Status ES 2108 G Port Status J Port Name Link State LACP TxPkts RxPkts Errors TxKB s RxKB s UpTime al Down STOP Disabled 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 2 Down STOP Disabled 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 3 Down STOP Disabled 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 4 Down STOP Disabled 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 5 100M F FORWARDING Disabled 231 272 2 350 1 533 0 02 23 B Down STOP Disabled 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 Td Down STOP Disabled 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 8 Down STOP Disabled 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 g Down STOP Disabled 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 7 Status LABEL DESCRIPTION Port This identifies the Ethernet port Click a port number to display the Port Details screen refer to Figure 30 on page 67 Name This field displays the name of the port Link This field displays the speed either 10M for 10Mbps 100M for 100Mbps or another value depending on the uplink module being used and the duplex F for full duplex or
114. ES 2108 Series Ethernet Switch User s Guide Version 3 8 10 2007 Edition 2 DEFAULT LOGIN IP Address http 192 168 1 1 User Name admin Password 1234 ZyXEL WWW zyxel com About This User s Guide About This User s Guide Intended Audience This manual is intended for people who want to install the ES 2108 Series Ethernet Switch and configure it using the web configurator or via commands You should have at least a basic knowledge of TCP IP networking concepts and topology Related Documentation Quick Start Guide The Quick Start Guide contains information on setting up your hardware Web Configurator Online Help Embedded web help for descriptions of individual screens and supplementary information Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Guide The CLI Reference Guide explains how to use the Command Line Interface CLI to configure the Switch BES It is recommended you use the web configurator to configure the Switch Supporting Disk Refer to the included CD for support documents ZyXEL Web Site Please refer to www zyxel com for additional support documentation and product certifications User Guide Feedback Help us help you Send all User Guide related comments questions or suggestions for improvement to the following address or use e mail instead Thank you The Technical Writing Team ZyXEL Communications Corp 6 Innovation Road II Science Based Industrial Park Hsinchu 300 Taiw
115. Figure 76 Advanced Application gt Multicast gt Multicast Setting IGMP Filtering Profile IGMP Filtering Profile Multicast Setting Profile Setup Profile Name Start Address End Address 224 0 0 0 224 0 0 0 Add Clear Profile Name Start Address End Address Delete Profile Delete Rule Default O 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 O Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 45 Advanced Application gt Multicast gt Multicast Setting gt IGMP Filtering Profile LABEL DESCRIPTION Profile Name Enter a descriptive name for the profile for identification purposes To configure additional rule s for a profile that you have already added enter the profile name and specify a different IP multicast address range Start Address Type the starting multicast IP address for a range of multicast IP addresses that you want to belong to the IGMP filter profile ES 2108 Series User s Guide Chapter 19 Multicast Table 45 Advanced Application gt Multicast gt Multicast Setting gt IGMP Filtering Profile LABEL DESCRIPTION End Address Type the ending multicast IP address for a range of IP addresses that you want to belong to the IGMP filter profile If you want to add a single multicast IP address enter it in both the Start Address and End Address fields Add Click Add to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or lo
116. I X port automatically works with a straight through or crossover Ethernet cable 3 1 2 1 Default Ethernet Settings The factory default negotiation settings for the Ethernet ports on the Switch are Speed Auto Duplex Auto Flow control off ES 2108 Series User s Guide Chapter 3 Hardware Overview 3 1 3 Fast Ethernet SFP Slot The ES 2108 F comes with a slot for 100 Base FX 100 Base LX or 100 Base BX Small Form Factor Pluggable SFP transceivers A transceiver is a single unit that houses a transmitter and a receiver The Switch does not come with transceivers You must use transceivers that comply with the SFP Transceiver MultiSource Agreement MSA See the SFF committee s INF 8074i specification Rev 1 0 for details You can change transceivers while the Switch is operating You can use different transceivers to connect to Ethernet switches with different types of fiber optic connectors Type SFP connection interface Connection speed 100 Mbps gt To avoid possible eye injury do not look into an operating fiber optic module s connectors See Section 3 1 4 1 on page 44 and Section 3 1 4 2 on page 45 for transceiver installation and removal instructions 3 1 4 Mini GBIC Slot This is a slot for mini GBIC Gigabit Interface Converter transceivers A transceiver is a single unit that houses a transmitter and a receiver The Switch does not come with transceivers You must use transceivers that comply wi
117. Internet Explorer 6 0 and later or Netscape Navigator 7 0 and later versions The recommended screen resolution is 1024 by 768 pixels In order to use the web configurator you need to allow Web browser pop up windows from your device Web pop up blocking is enabled by default in Windows XP SP Service Pack 2 Java Script enabled by default Java permissions enabled by default 4 2 System Login 1 Start your web browser 2 Type http and the IP address of the Switch for example the default is 192 168 1 1 in the Location or Address field Press ENTER 3 The login screen appears The default username is admin and associated default password is 1234 The date and time display as shown if you have not configured a time server nor manually entered a time and date in the General Setup screen ES 2108 Series User s Guide E Chapter 4 The Web Configurator Figure 20 Web Configurator Login Enternetwork Password TET Please type your user name and password Site 192 168 1 1 Realm ES 2108G at SatJan 01 00 14 27 2000 User Name Password Save this password in your password list omes 4 Click OK to view the first web configurator screen 4 3 The Status Screen The Status screen is the first screen that displays when you access the web configurator The following figure shows the navigating components of a web configurator screen Figure 21 Web Configurator Home Screen Status
118. L i a a m m m m m m m m um How much of the IP address is the network number and how much is the host ID varies according to the subnet mask Subnet Masks A subnet mask is used to determine which bits are part of the network number and which bits are part of the host ID using a logical AND operation The term subnet is short for sub network A subnet mask has 32 bits If a bit in the subnet mask is a 1 then the corresponding bit in the IP address is part of the network number If a bit in the subnet mask is 0 then the corresponding bit in the IP address is part of the host ID The following example shows a subnet mask identifying the network number in bold text and host ID of an IP address 192 168 1 2 in decimal Table 107 IP Address Network Number and Host ID Example OCTET OCTET OCTET Qu OCTET 192 168 1 IP Address Binary 11000000 10101000 00000001 00000010 Subnet Mask Binary 111111131 11111111 11111111 00000000 Network Number 11000000 10101000 00000001 Host ID 00000010 By convention subnet masks always consist of a continuous sequence of ones beginning from the leftmost bit of the mask followed by a continuous sequence of zeros for a total number of 32 bits Subnet masks can be referred to by the size of the network number part the bits with a 1 value For example an 8 bit mask means that the first
119. Link Aggregation Status LABEL DESCRIPTION Index This field displays the trunk ID to identify a trunk group that is one logical link containing multiple ports Enabled Ports These are the ports you have configured in the Link Aggregation screen to be in the trunk group Synchronized These are the ports that are currently transmitting data as one logical link in this trunk Ports group Aggregator ID Link Aggregator ID consists of system priority MAC address key port priority and port number Refer to Section 15 2 1 on page 122 for more information on this field Status This field displays how these ports were added to the trunk group It displays Static if the ports are configured as static members of a trunk group LACP if the ports are configured to join a trunk group via LACP 1 Port Priority and Port Number are 0 as it is the aggregator ID for the trunk group not the individual port 122 ES 2108 Series User s Guide Chapter 15 Link Aggregation 15 4 Link Aggregation Setup Click Advanced Application gt Link Aggregation gt Link Aggregation Setting to display the screen shown next See Section 15 1 on page 121 for more information on link aggregation Figure 63 Advanced Application gt Link Aggregation gt Link Aggregation Setting c ORNETTE Status LACP Group ID Active T1 Vv a Vv Port Group 1 None v None v None None v None JURA
120. MP System Traps OPTION OBJECT LABEL OBJECT ID DESCRIPTION coldstart coldStart 1 3 6 1 6 3 1 1 5 1 This trap is sent when the Switch is turned on warmstart warmStart 1 3 6 1 6 3 1 1 5 2 This trap is sent when the Switch restarts ES 2108 Series User s Guide Chapter 27 Access Control Table 79 SNMP System Traps continued OPTION OBJECT LABEL OBJECT ID DESCRIPTION fanspeed FanSpeedEventOn 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 xx 31 2 1 This trap is sent when the fan speed goes above or below the normal operating range FanSpeedEventClear 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 xx 31 2 2 This trap is sent when the fan speed returns to the normal operating range temperature TemperatureEventOn 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 xx 31 2 1 This trap is sent when the temperature goes above or below the normal operating range TemperatureEventClear 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 xx 31 2 2 This trap is sent when the temperature returns to the normal operating range voltage VoltageEventOn 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 xx 31 2 1 This trap is sent when the voltage goes above or below the normal operating range VoltageEventClear 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 xx 31 2 2 This trap is sent when the voltage returns to the normal operating range reset UncontrolledResetEventOn 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 xx 31 2 1 This trap is sent when the Switch automatically resets ControlledResetEvent
121. MP Trap Group ai ccccsdeusensctuadeachenssasanaescsadeeeseeauetaetemriacaiaaaeinnes 210 STA GOMO UD LOGIN ACCOUS c 211 Br 0 AD E E T ONAA A IA E E bor A A ap 213 Pg g 80 a S i onana rer OLEO 213 27 GSH Implementation Gh the NET asc cic ioci ceu eoe eee pet bre ERE petes nue Potete dor ce raenctes 214 27 7 1 Regurements Tor Using SSH uasa trita Fonti eodd a paa E Ead ua CY aD na 214 zr A Login SIT e E E D OS LT 215 27 9 bodas OE io HTTP or inasai dp bun dosdon dpt bab a 215 BIBEHVIPBOERTIDIS cou A E na ion sats EA cov fuserad rs d edta a edat d dde cad ul 216 27 9 1 Internet Explorer Warming Messages censes erret n rede ade 216 27 9 2 Netscape Navigator Warning Messages eeeeceeeeeeee eene 217 re he Nan e PR o EET 218 21 10 Seite PON recs Mer rc 218 ZnT Romo Managemen MOM err m 219 Chapter 28 OTAGO X X 221 ES 2108 Series User s Guide Table of Contents com E UncUI c 221 Chapter 29 cc a a a A a E m 223 ZONE I eR Rr a A 223 29 2 I vclit 223 2 aO TV SU asconsdir n odi rtaboradrpadxonbarixtcbodudictadiin ba Komma paci Fab ER COR ERE 224 Chapter 30 iHi A V E Y CO 0 A 227 30 1 Clustering Management Status Overview occ cicessccccsctercasecssscsensienessconsseurensnonneaioonsmmertens 227 30 2 Clustering Ma
122. N OBJECT LABEL OBJECT ID DESCRIPTION ping pingProbeFailed 1 3 6 1 2 1 80 0 1 This trap is sent when a single ping probe fails pingTestFailed 1 3 6 1 2 1 80 0 2 This trap is sent when a ping test consisting of a series of ping probes fails pingTestCompleted 1 3 6 1 2 1 80 0 3 This trap is sent when a ping test is completed ES 2108 Series User s Guide 207 Chapter 27 Access Control Table 82 SNMP IP Traps continued OPTION OBJECT LABEL OBJECT ID DESCRIPTION traceroute traceRoutePathChange 1 3 6 1 2 1 81 0 1 This trap is sent when a traceroute path changes traceRouteTestFailed 1 3 6 1 2 1 81 0 2 This trap is sent when a traceroute test fails traceRouteTestCompleted 1 3 6 1 2 1 81 0 3 This trap is sent when a traceroute test is completed Table 83 SNMP Switch Traps OPTION OBJECT LABEL OBJECT ID DESCRIPTION stp STPNewRoot 1 3 6 1 2 1 17 0 1 This trap is sent when the STP root switch changes MRSTPNewRoot 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 xx 43 2 1 This trap is sent when the MRSTP root switch changes MSTPNewRoot 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 xx 107 7 This trap is sent when the MSTP 0 1 root switch changes STPTopologyChange 1 3 6 1 2 1 17 0 2 This trap is sent when the STP topology changes MRSTPTopologyChange 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 xx 43 2 2 This trap is sent when the MRSTP topology changes MSTPTopologyChange 1 3 6 1 4 1
123. N Port Setting Port PVID GVRP Acceptable Frame Type VLAN Trunking link r a s r 2 Enter2 in the PVID 1 1 z A zi r field for port 5 and All ll t lick Apply t l 3 M LIB Z click Apply to save i s B uo B m ee the run time 6 1 P A T F memory Settings in 7 1 r Al 7 the run time B 1 o Al zi n memory are lost l Al E when the Switch s x A pply Cancel power is turned off 5 1 3 Configuring the Management IP Address The default management IP address of the Switch is 192 168 1 1 You can configure another IP address in a different subnet for management purposes The following figure shows an example ES 2108 Series User s Guide Chapter 5 Initial Setup Example Figure 27 Initial Setup Example Management IP Address 192 168 2 x s 78 Intemet VLAN2 Connect your computer to any Ethernet port on the Switch Make sure your computer is in the same subnet as the Switch Open your web browser and enter 192 168 1 1 the default IP address in the address bar to access the web configurator See Section 4 2 on page 51 for more information Click Basic Setting IP Setup in the navigation panel Configure the related fields in the IP Setup screen For the VLAN2 network enter 192 168 2 1 as the IP address and 255 255 255 0 as the subnet mask In the VID field enter the ID of the VLAN group to which you want this management IP address to belong This is the same
124. On 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 xx 31 2 1 This trap is sent when the Switch resets by an administrator through a management interface RebootEvent 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 1 1 2 This trap is sent when the Switch reboots by an administrator through a management interface timesync RTCNotUpdatedEventOn 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 xx 31 2 1 This trap is sent when the Switch fails to get the time and date from a time server RTCNotUpdatedEventClear 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 xx 31 2 2 This trap is sent when the Switch gets the time and date from a time server intrusionlock IntrusionLockEventOn 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 xx 31 2 1 This trap is sent when intrusion lock occurs on a port loopguard LoopguardEventOn 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 xx 31 2 1 This trap is sent when loopguard shuts down a port Table 80 SNMP Interface Traps OPTION OBJECT LABEL OBJECT ID DESCRIPTION linkup linkUp 1 3 6 1 6 3 1 1 5 4 This trap is sent when the Ethernet link is up LinkDownEventClear 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 xx 31 2 2 This trap is sent when the Ethernet link is up linkdown linkDown 1 3 6 1 6 3 1 1 5 3 This trap is sent when the Ethernet link is down LinkDownEventOn 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 xx 31 2 1 This trap is sent when the Ethernet link is down ES 2108 Series User s Guide Chapter 27 Access Control Table 80 SNMP Interface Traps continued OPTION OBJECT
125. P Application gt erint ietarsaureeaieebdacdiaielananieheceaerenseas 182 Table GG IP Applicaton gt DIGEN smesiirirnisiirn aa E AE E 186 PEG areni o TT 187 Table 68 IP Application gt DiffServ DSCP Seting iuuuscpscsete tpe cente EPescs sou lore uera so tne bati ia 188 Table G9 IP ADPIICAUO a DHCP i isicess tino pad ai Ya DL a 190 Tabie 8g rft dg IP ME E oo 0T 190 Table 71 IP Application c DHOP s Glebal 1253 prcocidri opcra ada eta o nr c doti pa a en ance 191 Table 2 IP Applicaton DHCP VLAN assirinassi iat ota nies pases cnr no aded Rak cdi riae 193 Table 73 UE onis m 197 Table 74 Filename Omens Juve denies uda e e ode RR a ERI Ud E Ka Ca dd rd RR dn 201 Table 75 General Commands for GUI based FTP Clients ssssssssseseeeeeennnnne 202 iE wid 4 c COON OVO 0l a 203 pri crede lie sansir oE AE ONE AEGEE aE ENA 204 Table 78 Private MIB OID Starting MU Die srirernisinesnnissinanir ti tage p pee YA Det iaie ui dae aia 205 Table 29 SNMP Sys TADS ousdueeetid a aO erbe pide ip x i RR Iq ob Gg red a dan as 205 Table 80 SNMP nieri aoe TaS coax celeteacuG nur pasa ckbUU DH UR RR OUR aab a tie Ga aL RUD EY Rd E ada 206 BE Gl AAA TADS e 207 ES 2108 Series User s Guide List of Tables TADE Be SNMP IF TEDS c cC 207 e 8S PMI E e E e E a T E T diay E E TT 208 Table 84 Management gt Access Control gt SNMP u ccecccccecesesceeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeesseeeeseeeseseeeaaeesesseeaaee
126. PWR Green SYS Green ALM Red Per Ethernet port LNK ACT Amber Green 1000BASE T RJ45 SPD Amber Green LNK ACT Green SFP LNK Green ACT Green 100FX LNK Green ACT Green Operating Environment Temperature 0 C 45 C 32 F 113 F Humidity 10 90 non condensing Storage Environment Temperature 10 C 70 C 13 F 158 F Humidity 10 90 non condensing The following are dimensions of an M4 tap screw and masonry plug used for wall mounting All measurements are in millimeters mm ES 2108 Series User s Guide Appendix A Product Specifications Figure 157 Masonry Plug and M4 Tap Screw 30 0 2 0 4 22401 e 01 e 16 30 0 2 0 Table 104 Firmware Specifications FEATURE DESCRIPTION Default IP Address 192 168 1 1 Default Subnet Mask 255 255 255 0 24 bits Administrator User Name admin Default Password 1234 Number of Login Accounts Configurable on the Switch 4 management accounts configured on the Switch Authentication via RADIUS and TACACS is also available VLAN A VLAN Virtual Local Area Network allows a physical network to be partitioned into multiple logical networks Devices on a logical network belong to one group A device can belong to more than one group With VLAN a device cannot directly talk to or hear from devices that are not in the same group s the traffic must first go through a router MAC Addres
127. Reason This field displays the reason the ARP packet was discarded MAC VLAN The MAC address and VLAN ID were not in the binding table IP The MAC address and VLAN ID were in the binding table but the IP address was not valid Port The MAC address VLAN ID and IP address were in the binding table but the port number was not valid Delete Select this and click Delete to remove the specified entry Delete Click this to remove the selected entries Cancel Click this to clear the Delete check boxes above 21 4 1 ARP Inspection Log Status Use this screen to look at log messages that were generated by ARP packets and that have not been sent to the syslog server yet To open this screen click Advanced Application gt IP Source Guard gt ARP Inspection gt Log Status ES 2108 Series User s Guide Chapter 21 IP Source Guard Figure 94 Advanced Application gt IP Source Guard gt ARP Inspection gt Log Status c OF Inspection Log Status Status Clearing log status table Apply Total number of logs 0 Index Port VID Sender MAC Sender IP NumPkts Reason Time The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 60 Advanced Application gt IP Source Guard gt ARP Inspection gt Log Status LABEL DESCRIPTION Clearing log status table Click Apply to remove all the log messages that were generated by ARP packets and that have not been sent to the syslog server yet Tot
128. S 2108 Series User s Guide Appendix B IP Addresses and Subnetting Table 117 16 bit Network Number Subnet Planning continued NO BORROWED NO HOSTS PER HOST BITS SUBNET MASK NO SUBNETS SUBNET 14 255 255 255 252 30 16384 2 15 255 255 255 254 31 32768 1 Configuring IP Addresses Where you obtain your network number depends on your particular situation If the ISP or your network administrator assigns you a block of registered IP addresses follow their instructions in selecting the IP addresses and the subnet mask If the ISP did not explicitly give you an IP network number then most likely you have a single user account and the ISP will assign you a dynamic IP address when the connection is established If this is the case it is recommended that you select a network number from 192 168 0 0 to 192 168 255 0 The Internet Assigned Number Authority LANA reserved this block of addresses specifically for private use please do not use any other number unless you are told otherwise You must also enable Network Address Translation NAT on the Switch Once you have decided on the network number pick an IP address for your Switch that is easy to remember for instance 192 168 1 1 but make sure that no other device on your network is using that IP address The subnet mask specifies the network number portion of an IP address Your Switch will compute the subnet mask automatically based on the
129. SCRIPTION ACTIVE Select this check box to activate the VLAN settings Name Enter a descriptive name for the VLAN group for identification purposes VLAN Group ID Enter the VLAN ID for this static entry the valid range is between 1 and 4094 Port The port number identifies the port you are configuring Settings in this row apply to all ports Use this row only if you want to make some settings the same for all ports Use this row first to set the common settings and then make adjustments on a port by port basis Note Changes in this row are copied to all the ports as soon as you make them Control Select Normal for the port to dynamically join this VLAN group using GVRP This is the default selection Select Fixed for the port to be a permanent member of this VLAN group Select Forbidden if you want to prohibit the port from joining this VLAN group Tagging Select TX Tagging if you want the port to tag all outgoing frames transmitted with this VLAN Group ID Add Click Add to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to reset the fields Clear Click Clear to start configuring the screen again VID This field displays the ID number of the
130. STP Click the RSTP link in the Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol Status screen to display the screen shown next Figure 55 Advanced Application gt Spanning Tree Protocol gt RSTP OEE ri BC IT Status Active rj Bridge Priority 32768 gt Hello Time e Seconds MAX Age o Seconds Forwarding Delay fis Seconds Port Active Priority Path Cost r EE m 1 7 EJ 19 2 n fize 18 3 C 28 9 4 1 128 13 5 128 18 6 C o8 19 7 DP INN 18 8 B h28 19 9 a EE 4 Apply Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 25 Advanced Application gt Spanning Tree Protocol gt RSTP i LABEL DESCRIPTION Status Click Status to display the Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol Status screen see Figure 56 on page 109 Active Select this check box to activate an STP tree Clear this check box to disable an STP tree Bridge Priority Bridge priority is used in determining the root switch root port and designated port The switch with the highest priority lowest numeric value becomes the STP root switch If all switches have the same priority the switch with the lowest MAC address will then become the root switch Select a value from the drop down list box The lower the numeric value you assign the higher the priority for this bridge Bridge Priority determines the root bridge which in turn determines Hello Time Max Age and Forwarding Delay Hello Time This is the time interval
131. T 198 Figure 118 Management gt Maintenance gt Firmware Upgrade seeeeeeeene 199 Figure 119 Management gt Maintenance gt Restore Configuration 200 Figure 120 Management gt Maintenance gt Backup Configuration sssssssssssee 200 Fue del Access CONTON auciosdpreHtiedisiesinddbbteetutex ecu tin bres T duds o eda eiu Latii d dbbe do iu cedN 203 Figure 122 SNMP Management Modal orta D xen a ra sani a LU b a ad apa RR I eux 204 Figure 123 Management gt Access Control gt SNMP cccceeeccecesneeeeeneeeeeaaeeeeeeeeceaeeeeeaaeeseeeeseaaaeeseaees 209 Figure 124 Management gt Access Control gt SNMP gt Trap Group sssssseeeeenn 211 ES 2108 Series User s Guide 23 List of Figures Figure 125 Management gt Access Control gt LOGINS ccceceeeccecseeeeeeeneeeeeaeeeeeeeeeceaeeeeeaeeeseaeeeeeaneeees 212 Pours 125 53H Dormimublcalon EXAME sssini eideann eka c nib eed Bd Pete apad 213 Figure 127 How SSH i e 214 Powe 129 23M inne nomaaa M o ad ntl i po vA Re AS 215 Figure 129 HT TP SRT acsedcacsto toin pr iste brem aes Ni 216 Figure 130 Security Alert Dialog Box Internet Explorer 1ieaueeccieeiseesucesscexecee unserer ior nn pate Enn n rena 217 Figure 194 Security Cerificate 1 Notesapil uus isesasai ktnrx a ia nianu iacit da adde Fanta d ica 217 Figure 132 Security Geriificate 2 Netscape 225 etesssv is tens txodi Fere tad naii 218 Figure 133 Example Lock Den
132. Type 1 Selecta VLAN type in the Switch Setup screen Figure 40 Switch Setup Select VLAN Type ETORT 80210 C Port Based MAC Address Learning Aging Time 300 seconds VLAN Type 8 5 Static VLAN Use a static VLAN to decide whether an incoming frame on a port should be sent toa VLAN group as normal depends on its VLAN tag sent to a group whether it has a VLAN tag or not blocked from a VLAN group regardless of its VLAN tag You can also tag all outgoing frames that were previously untagged from a port with the specified VID ES 2108 Series User s Guide Chapter 8 VLAN 8 5 1 Static VLAN Status See Section 8 1 on page 87 for more information on Static VLAN Click Advanced Application gt VLAN from the navigation panel to display the VLAN Status screen as shown next Figure 41 Advanced Application gt VLAN VLAN Status Index I2 e The Number of VLAN 2 OKENE VLAN Port Setting Static VLAN VID Elapsed Time Status 1 0 03 21 Static 2 0 03 21 Static Change Pages Previous Next The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 15 Advanced Application gt VLAN VLAN Status LABEL DESCRIPTION The Number of VLAN This is the number of VLANs configured on the Switch Index This is the VLAN index number Click on this to view port settings for the specified VLAN VID This is the VLAN identification number that was configured i
133. a Ea 31 USE IR AN P c 32 1 1 3 High Performance Switched EX amp mple uiu ssasa ea sinansa iadaa 33 1 1 4 IEEE 802 10 VLAN Application Exemplg eiit r irronneen ia 33 12 STU Manage Tb SWR sns b EP odia etant Rer d eens ca ird a Pre RAE 34 1 3 Good Habits Tor Managing the SWOI noscit sviediniai P Serv ERES oats 35 Chapter 2 Hardware Installation and Connection eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee nennen nnne nnne nnn 37 Nui Ng co e TT 37 2 2 Mound mo SIE GELS RACK neiii Nun Eat hauls cA kd Var Lose adi du etc d aaa 38 2 2 1 Hack mounted Installation Requirements 1 uoccccc coercere crecen teen ncc 38 2 2 2 Attaching the Mounting Brackets to the Switch eseeeeeee 38 2 2 3 Mounting the Switch on a Rack uisi iedte Er uo aek EFE En EHEEEEF OL OU SE PE QU De DER ERU US OK bre d SERERE OUR 39 23 Etre wn g 39 Chapter 3 Hardware Oval IB Lusia iMi Rp ARN IAE YE AR EQIR ELMAR KIM EATEN RM RUpA AQ URGI UA ME LAE TRUE RDUD UK nt Ri LIUM AR RM 41 Saaren ia I EI IT I ETE ITE 41 a ea UT cM Io NUI perenne rt tener er ree ere tren rrcent te reer eteres mrerrrees teen reer rer 43 ES 2108 Series User s Guide at Table of Contents cise BUS el PENS TTE 43 Sy Cree ee TINE Ui elsi ERO mo S 44 oe ee MISC SIO srai oh henna card E acaba iA aa 44 Silo 100 Base Faerie PON Gus arcet eren ddr tul e Ere n S dant ba nde dta 45 mt PEE Pa
134. a Pvt Ltd II Floor F2 9 Okhla Phase 1 New Delhi 110020 India Support E mail support zyxel co jp Sales E mail zyp zyxel co jp Telephone 81 3 6847 3700 Fax 81 3 6847 3705 Web www zyxel co jp Regular Mail ZyXEL Japan 3F Office T amp U 1 10 10 Higashi Gotanda Shinagawa ku Tokyo 141 0022 Japan Kazakhstan Support http zyxel kz support Sales E mail sales zyxel kz Telephone 7 3272 590 698 Fax 7 3272 590 689 Web www zyxel kz Regular Mail ZyXEL Kazakhstan 43 Dostyk Ave Office 414 Dostyk Business Centre 050010 Almaty Republic of Kazakhstan Malaysia Support E mail support zyxel com my Sales E mail sales zyxel com my Telephone 603 8076 9933 Fax 603 8076 9833 Web http www zyxel com my Regular Mail ZyXEL Malaysia Sdn Bhd 1 02 amp 1 03 Jalan Kenari 17F Bandar Puchong Jaya 47100 Puchong Selangor Darul Ehsan Malaysia North America Support E mail support zyxel com Support Telephone 1 800 978 7222 Sales E mail sales zyxel com Sales Telephone 1 714 632 0882 Fax 1 714 632 0858 Web www zyxel com ES 2108 Series User s Guide 273 Appendix D Customer Support 274 Regular Mail ZyXEL Communications Inc 1130 N Miller St Anaheim CA 92806 2001 U S A Norway Support E mail support zyxel no Sales E mail sales zyxel no Telephone 47 22 80 61 80 Fax 47 22 80 61 81 Web www zyxel no Regular Mail ZyXEL Communications A S Nils Ha
135. a user profile which is stored on the RADIUS server This appendix lists the RADIUS attributes supported by the Switch Refer to RFC 2865 for more information about RADIUS attributes used for authentication Refer to RFC 2866 and RFC 2869 for RADIUS attributes used for accounting This section lists the attributes used by authentication and accounting functions on the Switch In cases where the attribute has a specific format associated with it the format is specified ES 2108 Series User s Guide Chapter 20 Authentication amp Accounting 20 3 1 Attributes Used for Authentication The following sections list the attributes sent from the Switch to the RADIUS server when performing authentication 20 3 1 1 Attributes Used for Authenticating Privilege Access User Name a of the User Name attribute is enab where is the privilege level TUM NAS Identifier NAS IP Address 20 3 1 2 Attributes Used to Login Users User Name User Password NAS Identifier NAS IP Address 20 3 1 3 Attributes Used by the IEEE 802 1x Authentication User Name NAS Identifier NAS IP Address NAS Port NAS Port Type This value is set to Ethernet 15 on the Switch Calling Station Id Frame MTU EAP Message State Message Authenticator 20 3 2 Attributes Used for Accounting The following sections list the attributes sent from the Switch to the RADIUS server when performing authentication 20 3 2 1 Attributes Used for Accounting Syste
136. ading the wrong model firmware may damage your device 26 8 2 FTP Command Line Procedure ouahwnd Launch the FTP client on your computer Enter open followed by a space and the IP address of your Switch Enter the username when prompted for example admin Enter your password as requested the default is 1234 Enter bin to set transfer mode to binary Use put to transfer files from the computer to the Switch for example put firmware bin ras transfers the firmware on your computer firmware bin to the Switch and renames it to ras Similarly put config cfg config transfers the configuration file on your computer config cfg to the Switch and renames it to config Likewise get config config cfg transfers the configuration file on the ES 2108 Series User s Guide Chapter 26 Maintenance Switch to your computer and renames it to config cfg See Table 74 on page 201 for more information on filename conventions 7 Enter quit to exit the ftp prompt 26 8 3 GUI based FTP Clients The following table describes some of the commands that you may see in GUI based FTP clients Table 75 General Commands for GUI based FTP Clients COMMAND DESCRIPTION Host Address Enter the address of the host server Login Type Anonymous This is when a user I D and password is automatically supplied to the server for anonymous access Anonymous logins will work only if your ISP or service
137. administrator has enabled this option Normal The server requires a unique User ID and Password to login Transfer Type Transfer files in either ASCII plain text format or in binary mode Configuration and firmware files should be transferred in binary mode Initial Remote Specify the default remote directory path Directory Initial Local Directory Specify the default local directory path 26 8 4 FTP Restrictions FIP will not work when FTP service is disabled in the Access Control screen The IP address es in the Secured Client Set in the Remote Management screen does not match the client IP address If it does not match the Switch will disallow the session ES 2108 Series User s Guide Access Control This chapter describes how to control access to the Switch 27 1 Access Control Overview A console port and FTP are allowed one session each Telnet and SSH share nine sessions up to five Web sessions five different usernames and passwords and or limitless SNMP access control sessions are allowed Table 76 Access Control Overview Console Port SSH Telnet FTP Web SNMP One session Share up to nine One session Up to five accounts No limit sessions A console port access control session and Telnet access control session cannot coexist when multi login is disabled See the CLI Reference Guide for information on disabling multi login 27 2 The Access Control Main Scree
138. ake sure the distance between the centers of the holes matches what is listed in the product specifications appendix D gt Be careful to avoid damaging pipes or cables located inside the wall when drilling holes for the screws 3 Do not screw the screws all the way into the wall Leave a small gap of about 0 5 cm between the heads of the screws and the wall 4 Make sure the screws are snugly fastened to the wall They need to hold the weight of the Switch with the connection cables 5 Align the holes on the back of the Switch with the screws on the wall Hang the Switch on the screws Figure 9 Wall mounting Example ES 2108 Series User s Guide Hardware Overview This chapter describes the front panel and rear panel of the Switch and shows you how to make the hardware connections 3 1 Front Panel Connection The figure below shows the front panel of the Switch Figure 10 Front Panel ES 2108 Console Port 10 100 Mbps Ethernet Ports Figure 11 Front Panel ES 2108 F iil TT ond Console Port 10 100 Mbps Ethernet Ports Fast Ethernet SFP Open Slot for Transceiver ES 2108 Series User s Guide Chapter 3 Hardware Overview Figure 12 Front Panel ES 2108 G ES 2108PWR m oru mm Console Port 10 100 Mbps Ethernet Ports RJ 45 Gigabit Mini GBIC Dual Personality Interfaces Figure 13 Front Panel ES 2108 LC 100 Base FX Fiber Optic Port a acc Consol
139. al number of logs This field displays the number of log messages that were generated by ARP packets and that have not been sent to the syslog server yet If one or more log messages are dropped due to unavailable buffer there is an entry called overflow with the current number of dropped log messages Index This field displays a sequential number for each log message Port This field displays the source port of the ARP packet VID This field displays the source VLAN ID of the ARP packet Sender MAC This field displays the source MAC address of the ARP packet Sender IP This field displays the source IP address of the ARP packet Num Pkts This field displays the number of ARP packets that were consolidated into this log message The Switch consolidates identical log messages generated by ARP packets in the log consolidation interval into one log message You can configure this interval in the ARP Inspection Configure screen See Section 21 5 on page 170 Reason This field displays the reason the log message was generated static deny An ARP packet was discarded because it violated a static binding with the same MAC address and VLAN ID deny An ARP packet was discarded because there were no bindings with the same MAC address and VLAN ID static permit An ARP packet was forwarded because it matched a static binding In the ARP Inspection VLAN Configure screen you can configure the Switch to generate log messages when
140. alf Duplex 10M Full Duplex 100M Half Duplex 100M Full Duplex or 1000M Full Duplex For the mini GBIC slot on the ES 2108 LC select Auto or 1000M Full Duplex The port speed and the duplex mode are fixed 100M Full Duplex for the 100 Base FX fiber optic port on the ES 2108 LC and the Fast Ethernet SFP transceiver connection on the ES 2108 F Selecting Auto auto negotiation allows one port to negotiate with a peer port automatically to obtain the connection speed and duplex mode that both ends support When auto negotiation is turned on a port on the Switch negotiates with the peer automatically to determine the connection speed and duplex mode If the peer port does not support auto negotiation or turns off this feature the Switch determines the connection speed by detecting the signal on the cable and using half duplex mode When the Switch s auto negotiation is turned off a port uses the pre configured speed and duplex mode when making a connection thus requiring you to make sure that the settings of the peer port are the same in order to connect Flow Control A concentration of traffic on a port decreases port bandwidth and overflows buffer memory causing packet discards and frame losses Flow Control is used to regulate transmission of signals to match the bandwidth of the receiving port The Switch uses IEEE802 3x flow control in full duplex mode and back pressure flow control in half duplex mode IEEE802 3x flow control is
141. ame Enter the username to be sent to the SNMP manager along with the SNMP v3 trap Note This username must match an existing account on the Switch configured in Management gt Access Control gt Logins screen User Information Use this section to configure users for authentication with managers using SNMP v3 Note Use the username and password of the login accounts you specify in this section to create accounts on the SNMP v3 manager Index This is a read only number identifying a login account on the Switch Username This field displays the username of a login account on the Switch Security Level Select whether you want to implement authentication and or encryption for SNMP communication from this user Choose noauth to use the username as the password string to send to the SNMP manager This is equivalent to the Get Set and Trap Community in SNMP v2c This is the lowest security level auth to implement an authentication algorithm for SNMP messages sent by this user priv to implement authentication and encryption for SNMP messages sent by this user This is the highest security level Note The settings on the SNMP manager must be set at the same security level or higher than the security level settings on the Switch Authentication Select an authentication algorithm MD5 Message Digest 5 and SHA Secure Hash Algorithm are hash algorithms used to authenticate SNMP data SHA authent
142. ame for this rule This is for identification purpose only MAC This field displays the source MAC address with the VLAN identification number to Address which the MAC address belongs VID This field displays the VLAN group identification number Delete Check the rule s that you want to remove in the Delete column and then click the Delete button Cancel Click Cancel to clear the selected check box es in the Delete column ES 2108 Series User s Guide Spanning Tree Protocol The Switch supports Spanning Tree Protocol STP Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol RSTP and Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol MSTP as defined in the following standards IEEE 802 1D Spanning Tree Protocol IEEE 802 1w Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol IEEE 802 1s Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol The Switch also allows you to set up multiple STP configurations or trees Ports can then be assigned to the trees 11 1 STP RSTP Overview BS R STP detects and breaks network loops and provides backup links between switches bridges or routers It allows a Switch to interact with other R STP compliant switches in your network to ensure that only one path exists between any two stations on the network The Switch uses IEEE 802 1w RSTP Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol that allows faster convergence of the spanning tree than STP while also being backwards compatible with STP only aware bridges In RSTP topology change information is directly propagated
143. ame on the external RADIUS server and the Chapter 20 Authentication amp Accounting Table 49 Advanced Application gt Auth and Acct gt RADIUS Server Setup continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Delete Check this box if you want to remove an existing RADIUS server entry from the Switch This entry is deleted when you click Apply Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh Accounting Use this section to configure your RADIUS accounting server settings Server Timeout Specify the amount of time in seconds that the Switch waits for an accounting request response from the RADIUS accounting server Index This is a read only number representing a RADIUS accounting server entry IP Address Enter the IP address of an external RADIUS accounting server in dotted decimal notation UDP Port The default port of a RADIUS accounting server for accounting is 1813 You need not change this value unless your network administrator instructs you to do so Shared Secret Specify a password up to 32 alphanumeric characters as the key to be shared between the external RADIUS accounting server and the Switch This key is not sent over the network
144. an E mail techwriters 9 zyxel com tw ES 2108 Series User s Guide 3 Document Conventions Document Conventions Warnings and Notes These are how warnings and notes are shown in this User s Guide gt Warnings tell you about things that could harm you or your device BS Notes tell you other important information for example other things you may need to configure or helpful tips or recommendations Syntax Conventions The Switch Series may be referred to as the Switch the device the system or the product in this User s Guide Product labels screen names field labels and field choices are all in bold font A key stroke is denoted by square brackets and uppercase text for example ENTER means the enter or return key on your keyboard Enter means for you to type one or more characters and then press the ENTER key Select or choose means for you to use one of the predefined choices A right angle bracket gt within a screen name denotes a mouse click For example Maintenance gt Log gt Log Setting means you first click Maintenance in the navigation panel then the Log sub menu and finally the Log Setting tab to get to that screen Units of measurement may denote the metric value or the scientific value For example k for kilo may denote 1000 or 1024 M for mega may denote 1000000 or 1048576 and so on
145. and make sure the power source is turned on turn on when you R turn on the y If the error persists you may have a hardware problem In this case you should Switch contact your vendor 34 2 Problems Accessing the Switch Table 101 Troubleshooting Accessing the Switch PROBLEM CORRECTIVE ACTION cannot Make sure the ports are properly connected access the You may have exceeded the maximum number of concurrent Telnet sessions Close Switch using other Telnet session s or try connecting again later Telnet Check that you have enabled Telnet service access If you have configured a secured client IP address your computer s IP address must match it Refer to the chapter on access control for details cannot The administrator username is admin The default administrator password is 1234 access the The username and password are case sensitive Make sure that you enter the correct web password and username using the proper casing If you have changed the password configurator and have now forgotten it you will need to upload the default configuration file This restores all of the factory defaults including the password If you have configured more than one IP interface make sure another administrator is NOT logged into the web configurator on a different IP interface using the same account Check that you have enabled web service access If you have configured a secured client IP address
146. as the VLAN ID you configure in the Static VLAN screen Click Add to save your changes back to the run time memory Settings in the run time memory are lost when the Switch s power is turned off a Setu Domain Name Server 0 0 0 0 Default ManagementIP DHCP Client Static IP Address Address VID IP Address 192 168 1 1 IP Subnet Mask 255 255 255 0 Default Gateway 0 0 0 0 1 Apply Cancel Management IP Addresses Index IP Subnet Mask VID Default Gateway IP Address CAHE oss 2552550 8 ED sni Add Cancel IP Subnet Mask VID Delete Cancel Default Gateway Delete ES 2108 Series User s Guide System Status and Port Statistics This chapter describes the system status web configurator home page and port details screens 6 1 Port Status Overview The home screen of the web configurator displays a port statistical summary table with links to each port showing statistical details To view the port statistics click Status in all web configurator screens to display the Status screen as shown next ES The ES 2108PWR screen is different from the other models covered in this UG The screen from ES 2108 G model is shown for comparison Figure 28 Status ES 2108PWR OLDE Port Name Link State PD LACP TxPkts RxPkts Errors TxKB is RxKB s Up Time 1 Down STOP Off Disabled 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 2 Down STOP off Disabled 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 3
147. at control and monitor managed devices The managed devices contain object variables managed objects that define each piece of information to be collected about a switch Examples of variables include such as number of packets received node port status etc A Management Information Base MIB is a collection of managed objects SNMP allows a manager and agents to communicate for the purpose of accessing these objects SNMP itself is a simple request response protocol based on the manager agent model The manager issues a request and the agent returns responses using the following protocol operations Table 77 SNMP Commands COMMAND DESCRIPTION Get Allows the manager to retrieve an object variable from the agent Get Next Allows the manager to retrieve the next object variable from a table or list within an agent In SNMPv1 when a manager wants to retrieve all elements of a table from an agent it initiates a Get operation followed by a series of Get Next operations Set Allows the manager to set values for object variables within an agent Trap Used by the agent to inform the manager of some events ES 2108 Series User s Guide Chapter 27 Access Control 27 3 1 SNMP v3 and Security SNMP v3 enhances security for SNMP management SNMP managers can be required to authenticate with agents before conducting SNMP management sessions Security can be further enhanced by encrypting the SNMP messages sent
148. ates two sub networks to isolate a group of servers from the rest of the company network for security reasons In this example the company network address is 192 168 1 0 The first three octets of the address 192 168 1 are the network number and the remaining octet is the host ID allowing a maximum of 28 2 or 254 possible hosts The following figure shows the company network before subnetting Figure 159 Subnetting Example Before Subnetting a a Y Internet I i i i P I I i a i u y 192 168 1 0 24 4 4 m um um m Em m m m Em m um You can borrow one of the host ID bits to divide the network 192 168 1 0 into two separate sub networks The subnet mask is now 25 bits 255 255 255 128 or 25 The borrowed host ID bit can have a value of either 0 or 1 allowing two subnets 192 168 1 0 25 and 192 168 1 128 25 The following figure shows the company network after subnetting There are now two sub networks A and B ES 2108 Series User s Guide Appendix B IP Addresses and Subnetting Figure 160 Subnetting Example After Subnetting 17 B if Hi ia jl et D s C 2 D et il cu Nm LE 1192 168 1 0 25 4 x192 168 1 128 251 ee ee eee um um PP m m m m m m m n VA In a 25 bit subnet the host ID has 7 bits so each sub network has a maximum of 27 2 or 126
149. authentication Specify how often a client has to re enter his or her username and password to stay Timer connected to the port Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh ES 2108 Series User s Guide Chapter 16 Port Authentication ES 2108 Series User s Guide Port Security This chapter shows you how to set up port security 17 1 Port Security Overview BS Port security allows only packets with dynamically learned MAC addresses and or configured static MAC addresses to pass through a port on the Switch See Chapter 9 on page 97 for information on configuring static MAC address forwarding For maximum port security enable this feature disable MAC address learning and configure static MAC address es for a port Functionally the Switch allows for three possible outcomes with port security You can configure the ports to Forward all packets and learn all MAC addresses Drop all packets from unknown MAC addresses and do not learn MAC addresses Drop all packets from unknown MAC addresses and learn a limited number of MAC addresses The ES 2108 Series supports five possible configurations for port secu
150. ave your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to start configuring the screen again ES 2108 Series User s Guide Link Aggregation This chapter shows you how to logically aggregate physical links to form one logical higher bandwidth link 15 1 Link Aggregation Overview Link aggregation trunking is the grouping of physical ports into one logical higher capacity link You may want to trunk ports if for example it is cheaper to use multiple lower speed links than to under utilize a high speed but more costly single port link However the more ports you aggregate then the fewer available ports you have A trunk group is one logical link containing multiple ports The beginning port of each trunk group must be physically connected to form a trunk group 15 2 Dynamic Link Aggregation The Switch adheres to the IEEE 802 3ad standard for static and dynamic LACP port trunking The IEEE 802 3ad standard describes the Link Aggregation Control Protocol LACP for dynamically creating and managing trunk groups When you enable LACP link aggregation on a port the port can automatically negotiate with the ports at the remote end of a link to establish trunk groups LACP also allows port redundancy that is if an operational port fails then one of the standby ports become operational without user intervention Please note that You must connect all ports point to point t
151. ay screen Click IP Application gt DHCP in the navigation panel and click the Global link to display the screen as shown Figure 110 IP Application gt DHCP gt Global ED DHCP Relay m Status Active O Remote DHCP Server 1 0 0 0 0 Remote DHCP Server 2 0 0 0 0 Remote DHCP Server 3 0 0 0 0 Relay Agent Information O Option 82 Information ES 2108 G Apply Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 71 IP Application gt DHCP gt Global LABEL DESCRIPTION Active Select this check box to enable DHCP relay Remote Enter the IP address of a DHCP server in dotted decimal notation DHCP Server 1 43 Relay Agent Select the Option 82 check box to have the Switch add information slot number port Information number and VLAN ID to client DHCP requests that it relays to a DHCP server screen requests that it relays to a DHCP server Information This read only field displays the system name you configure in the General Setup Select the check box for the Switch to add the system name to the client DHCP configuring Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh ES 2
152. back of the list The next queue is given an equal amount of bandwidth and then moves to the end of the list and so on depending on the number of queues being used This works in a looping fashion until a queue is empty ES 2108 Series User s Guide 135 Chapter 18 Queuing Method Weighted Round Robin Scheduling WRR uses the same algorithm as round robin scheduling but services queues based on their priority and queue weight the number you configure in the queue Weight field rather than a fixed amount of bandwidth WRR is activated only when a port has more traffic than it can handle Queues with larger weights get more service than queues with smaller weights This queuing mechanism is highly efficient in that it divides any available bandwidth across the different traffic queues and returns to queues that have not yet emptied 18 2 Configuring Queuing Method Click Advanced Application gt Queuing Method in the navigation panel Figure 72 Advanced Application gt Queuing Method I Method g N q C Strictly Priority weighted Round Robin Scheduling Q0 Weight fi x Q1 Weight fi zl Q2 Weight fi x Q3 Weight 15 Apply Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 41 Advanced Application Queuing Method LABEL DESCRIPTION Method Select Strictly Priority or Weighted Round Robin Scheduling Strict Priority Queuing SPQ services queues based on priority
153. be viewed or security certificate A The security certificate was issued by a company you have No View Certificate not chosen to trust View the certificate to determine whether you want to trust the certifying authority The security certificate date is valid The name on the security certificate is invalid or does not match the name of the site you want to proceed 27 9 2 Netscape Navigator Warning Messages When you attempt to access the Switch HTTPS server a Website Certified by an Unknown Authority screen pops up asking if you trust the server certificate Click Examine Certificate if you want to verify that the certificate is from the Switch If Accept this certificate temporarily for this session is selected then click OK to continue in Netscape Select Accept this certificate permanently to import the Switch s certificate into the SSL client Figure 131 Security Certificate 1 Netscape A Website Certified by an Unknown Authority x Unable to verify the identity of ES 2024A 0013491ad4fa as a trusted site Possible reasons for this error Your browser does not recognize the Certificate Authority that issued the site s certificate The site s certificate is incomplete due to a server misconfiguration You are connected to a site pretending to be ES 2024A 0013491ad4fa possibly to obtain your confidential information Please notify the site s webmaster about this problem Before acc
154. cation Dial In User Service RFC 2139 RADIUS Accounting RFC 2236 Internet Group Management Protocol Version 2 RFC 2865 RADIUS Vendor Specific Attribute RFC 2674 P BRIDGE MIB Q BRIDGE MIB RFC 3046 DHCP Relay RFC 3164 Syslog RFC 3414 User based Security Model USM for version 3 of the Simple Network Management Protocol SNMP v3 RFC 3580 RADIUS Tunnel Protocol Attribute IEEE 802 1x Port Based Network Access Control IEEE 802 1D MAC Bridges IEEE 802 1p Traffic Types Packet Priority IEEE 802 1Q Tagged VLAN IEEE 802 1w Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol RSTP IEEE 802 1s Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol MSTP IEEE 802 3 Packet Format IEEE 802 3ad Link Aggregation IEEE 802 3ah Ethernet OAM Operations Administration and Maintenance IEEE 802 3x Flow Control ES 2108 Series User s Guide Appendix A Product Specifications Table 106 Standards Supported continued STANDARD DESCRIPTION Safety UL 60950 1 CSA 60950 1 EN 60950 1 IEC 60950 1 EMC FCC Part 15 Class A CE EMC Class A ES 2108 Series User s Guide Appendix A Product Specifications ES 2108 Series User s Guide IP Addresses and Subnetting This appendix introduces IP addresses and subnet masks IP addresses identify individual devices on a network Every networking device including computers servers routers printers etc needs an IP address to communicate across the network These
155. chapter introduces the queuing methods supported 18 1 Queuing Method Overview Queuing is used to help solve performance degradation when there is network congestion Use the Queuing Method screen to configure queuing algorithms for outgoing traffic See also Priority Queue Assignment in Switch Setup and 802 1p Priority in Port Setup for related information Queuing algorithms allow switches to maintain separate queues for packets from each individual source or flow and prevent a source from monopolizing the bandwidth Table 40 Physical Queue Priority QUEUE PRIORITY Q3 4 highest Q2 3 Q1 2 QO 1 lowest 18 1 1 Strict Priority Queuing SPQ Strict Priority Queuing SPQ services queues based on priority only As traffic comes into the Switch traffic on the highest priority queue Q3 is transmitted first When that queue empties traffic on the next highest priority queue Q2 is transmitted until Q2 empties and then traffic is transmitted on Q1 and so on If higher priority queues never empty then traffic on lower priority queues never gets sent SPQ does not automatically adapt to changing network requirements 18 1 2 Weighted Round Robin Scheduling WRR Round Robin Scheduling services queues on a rotating basis and is activated only when a port has more traffic than it can handle A queue is a given an amount of bandwidth irrespective of the incoming traffic on that port This queue then moves to the
156. configuration file you wish to restore in the File Path text box or click Browse to locate it After you have specified the file click Restore config is the name of the configuration file on the Switch so your backup configuration file is automatically renamed when you restore using this screen 26 7 Backup Configuration File Backing up your Switch configurations allows you to create various snap shots of your device from which you may restore at a later date Back up your current Switch configuration to a computer using the Backup Configuration screen Figure 120 Management gt Maintenance gt Backup Configuration Backup Configuration _ Maintenance This page allows you to back up the device s current configuration to your workstation Now click the Backup button Backup Follow the steps below to back up the current Switch configuration to your computer in this screen 1 Click Backup 2 Click Save to display the Save As screen 3 Choose a location to save the file on your computer from the Save in drop down list box and type a descriptive name for it in the File name list box Click Save to save the configuration file to your computer 26 8 FTP Command Line This section shows some examples of uploading to or downloading files from the Switch using FTP commands First understand the filename conventions ES 2108 Series User s Guide Chapter 26 Maintenance 26 8 1 Filename Co
157. d Application gt Bandwidth Control Active Port Active O O yi or nr B Wn EE E m E a Uo a E o e Bandwidth Contro J r Ingress Rate Kbps 64 Kbps 64 Kbps 64 Kbps 64 Kbps 64 Kbps 64 Kbps 64 Kbps 64 Kbps 64 Kbps Active E LIH EIER EIE DL Ee ERE Egress Rate Kbps 64 Kbps 64 Kbps 64 Kbps 64 Kbps 64 Kbps 64 Kbps 64 Kbps 4 Kbps 4 Kbps Apply Cancel The following table describes the related labels in this screen Table 29 Advanced Application gt Bandwidth Control LABEL DESCRIPTION Active Select this check box to enable bandwidth control on the Switch Port This field displays the port number ES 2108 Series User s Guide Chapter 12 Bandwidth Control Table 29 Advanced Application gt Bandwidth Control continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Settings in this row apply to all ports Use this row only if you want to make some settings the same for all ports Use this row first to set the common settings and then make adjustments on a port by port basis Note Changes in this row are copied to all the ports as soon as you make them Active Make sure to select this check box to activate ingress limits on a port Ingress Rate Specify the maximum bandwidth allowed in Kilobits per second Kbps for the incoming traffic flow on a port If you enter a number between 64 and 1728 the Switch automatically rounds the numbe
158. der to be able to use a domain name instead of an IP address Default Configure the fields to set the default management IP address Management IP Address DHCP Client Select this option if you have a DHCP server that can assign the Switch an IP address and subnet mask a default gateway IP address and a domain name server IP address Static IP Select this option if you don t have a DHCP server or if you wish to assign static IP Address address information to the Switch You need to fill in the following fields when you select this option IP Enter the IP address of your Switch in dotted decimal notation for example 192 168 1 1 Address IP Enter the IP subnet mask of your Switch in dotted decimal notation for example at 255 255 255 0 as ES 2108 Series User s Guide Chapter 7 Basic Setting Table 12 Basic Setting gt IP Setup continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Default Enter the IP address of the default outgoing gateway in dotted decimal notation for Gateway example 192 168 0 254 VID Enter the VLAN identification number associated with the IP address This is the VLAN ID of the CPU and is used for management only The default is 1 All ports by default are fixed members of this management VLAN in order to manage the device from any port If a port is not a member of this VLAN then users on that port cannot access the device To access the Switch make sure the port that you
159. displays the VLAN identification number of the network Default This field displays the default gateway of the Switch Gateway Delete Click Delete to remove the selected entry from the summary table Cancel Click Cancel to clear the Delete check boxes 7 7 Port Setup Ethernet port connections can be in half duplex or full duplex mode Full duplex refers to a device s ability to send and receive simultaneously while half duplex indicates that traffic can flow in only one direction at a time The Ethernet port must use the same speed or duplex mode setting as the peer Ethernet port in order to connect ES 2108 Series User s Guide Chapter 7 Basic Setting Full duplex mode operation only applies to point to point access for example when attaching the Switch to a workstation server or another switch When connecting to hubs use a standard cascaded connection set at half duplex operation Auto negotiation regulates the speed and duplex of each port based on the capability of both devices When auto negotiation is turned on an Ethernet port on the Switch negotiates with the peer automatically to determine the connection speed and duplex mode If the peer Ethernet port does not support auto negotiation or turns off this feature the Switch determines the connection speed by detecting the signal on the cable and using half duplex mode When the Switch s auto negotiation is turned off an Ethernet port uses the pre configu
160. dvanced Application gt Auth and Acct gt Auth and Acct Setup sessssssssss 157 Els Notkerus 159 Table 53 Supported Tunnel Protocol Attrib te 1 ecemiesece nat tnk erat nauta aA Rada 160 Table 54 RADIUS Attributes Exec Events via Console ssssssseseeeeeeenenne nens 162 Table 55 RADIUS Attributes Exec Events via Telnet SSH ssssssssssseeeeeeennnnene 162 Table 56 RADIUS Attributes Exec Events via Console ccscceececeeeseeeeeeeeeeeaaeeeeeeeeeeaaeeseeeeeeeeaaenees 162 Table 57 Advanced Application gt IP Source Guard eee trente et rktexR3 FkR FRE ER sanczemniene 167 Table 58 Advanced Application gt IP Source Guard gt Static Binding sssessssssss 168 Table 59 Advanced Application gt IP Source Guard gt ARP Inspection Status ssuss 169 Table 60 Advanced Application gt IP Source Guard gt ARP Inspection gt Log Status 170 Table 61 Advanced Application gt IP Source Guard gt ARP Inspection gt Configure 171 Table 62 Advanced Application gt IP Source Guard gt ARP Inspection gt Configure gt Port 173 Table 63 Advanced Application gt IP Source Guard gt ARP Inspection gt Configure gt VLAN 173 Table 64 Advanced Application gt Loop Guard esceccseececissetesseeteeesneneseenduntiebeeseaierdenennnaebeanecuuainbens 177 Table 69 I
161. e Chapter 6 System Status and Port Statistics The ES 2108PWR screen is different from the other models covered in this UG The screen from ES 2108 G model is shown for comparison Figure 30 Status Port Details ES 2108PWR Port Info TX Packet RX Packet TX Collision Error Packet Distribution xn See Port NO Name Link Status PD PowerConsumption mW PD MaxCurrent mA PD MaxPower m LACP TxPkts RxPkts Errors Tx KBsis Rx KBs s Up Time TX Packets Multicast Broadcast Pause RX Packets Multicast Broadcast Pause Single Multiple Excessive Late RX CRC Runt 64 65 to 127 128 to 255 256 to 511 51210 1023 1024 to 1518 Giant Down STOP 0 0 0 oioioioioi io WE o ME oi oio RE ooi o RE oioi io RE oi oi ioioioio 0 Disabled 00 00 Port Status ES 2108 Series User s Guide Chapter 6 System Status and Port Statistics Figure 31 Status Port Details ES 2108 G Port Info TX Packet RX Packet TX Collision Error Packet Distribution Port Details Port Status Port NO 1 Name Link Down Status STOP LACP Disabled TxPkts 0 RxPkts 0 Errors 0 Tx KBs s 0 0 Rx KBs s 0 0 Up Time 0 00 00 TX Packets Multicast Broadcast Pause RX Packets e Multicast Broadcast Pause Single Multiple Excessive Late RX CRC Runt 64 65 to 127 128 to 255 256 to 511 51210 1023 1024 to 1518 Giant C 0 0 0 0 0 8 0 S 0
162. e V The power supply for each voltage has a sensor that is capable of detecting and reporting if the voltage falls out of the tolerance range Current This is the current voltage reading MAX This field displays the maximum voltage measured at this point MIN This field displays the minimum voltage measured at this point Threshold This field displays the minimum voltage at which the Switch should work Status Normal indicates that the voltage is within an acceptable operating range at this point otherwise Error is displayed 7 3 General Setup Use this screen to enter administrative details and time settings Click Basic Setting gt General Setup in the navigation panel to display the screen as shown ES 2108 Series User s Guide Chapter 7 Basic Setting Figure 34 Basic Setting gt General Setup OEE aD System Name Es 21 08 G Location Contact Person s Name Use Time Server when Bootup Time Server IP Address Current Time New Time hh mm ss Current Date New Date yyyy mm dd Time Zone UTC Daylight Saving Time O Start Date First 4 of jay E at 0 00 End Date First Y of Janay Ej at 0 00 It will take 60 seconds if time server is unreachable Apply Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 10 Basic Setting gt General Setup LABEL DESCRIPTION System Name Choose a descriptive name for identification purposes This name consists of
163. e Port ini 10 100 Mbps Ethernet Ports Mini GBIC slot The following table describes the port labels on the front panel Table 2 Front Panel PORT DESCRIPTION All Models CONSOLE Only connect this port if you want to configure the Switch using the command line interface CLI via the console port Eight 10 100 Connect these ports to a computer a hub an Ethernet switch or router Mbps RJ 45 Ethernet Ports ES 2108 F Fast Ethernet Use a 100 Base FX 100 Base LX or 100 Base BX Small Form Factor Pluggable SFP Slot SFP transceiver in this slot for fiber optic connections to backbone Ethernet Switches ES 2108 LC Mini GBIC Slot Use a mini GBIC transceiver in this slot for a connection to a backbone Ethernet switch 100 Base FX This is a 100 Base FX fiber optic module and is only available on the ES 2108 LC d Use the fiber optic cable to connect this uplink port to a backbone Ethernet switch or ES 2108 G ES 2108PWR Dual This interface has one 1000BASE T copper Ru 45 port and one Small Form Factor Personality Pluggable SFP slot with one of them active at a time Interface ES 2108 Series User s Guide Chapter 3 Hardware Overview Table 2 Front Panel continued PORT DESCRIPTION 100 1000 Connect this Gigabit Ethernet port to high bandwidth backbone network Ethernet Mbps RJ switches 45 Gigabit Port Mini GBIC Use mini GBIC transceivers in
164. e Specifications FEATURE DESCRIPTION Firmware Upgrade Download new firmware when available from the ZyXEL web site and use the web configurator CLI or an FTP TFTP tool to put it on the Switch Note Only upload firmware for your specific model Restoration Configuration Backup amp Make a copy of the Switch s configuration and put it back on the Switch later if you decide you want to revert back to an earlier configuration Access Control You can specify the service s and computer IP address es to control access to the Switch for management Cluster Management Cluster management also known as iStacking allows you to manage switches through one switch called the cluster manager The switches must be directly connected and be in the same VLAN group so as to be able to communicate with one another Table 105 Switching Specifications Layer 2 Features Bridging 8 K MAC addresses Static MAC address filtering by source destination Broadcast storm control Static MAC address forwarding Switching Switching fabric 5 6 Gbps non blocking Max Frame size 1522 bytes Forwarding frame IEEE 802 3 IEEE 802 1q Ethernet Il PPPoE Prevent the forwarding of corrupted packets STP IEEE 802 1w Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol RSTP IEEE 802 1s Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol QoS IEEE 802 1p Four priority queues per port Port based egress traffic shaping Supports IGMP
165. e Switch See Section 7 6 on page 78 for information on how to set up management IP addresses for VLANs Figure 113 IP Application gt DHCP gt VLAN VID I RUEAMEDSDDNNNM Remote DHCP Server 1 Remote DHCP Server 2 Remote DHCP Server 3 Relay Agent Information Status VID 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Option 82 ES 2108 G Add Cancel Clear Information E Type DHCP Status Delete 1 2 3 4 O Delete Cancel Relay The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 72 IP Application gt DHCP gt VLAN LABEL DESCRIPTION VID Enter the ID number of the VLAN to which these DHCP settings apply Remote DHCP Enter the IP address of a DHCP server in dotted decimal notation Server 1 3 Relay Agent Select the Option 82 check box to have the Switch add information slot number Information port number and VLAN ID to client DHCP requests that it relays to a DHCP server Information This read only field displays the system name you configure in the General Setup Screen Select the check box for the Switch to add the system name to the client DHCP requests that it relays to a DHCP server Add Click Add to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done config
166. e you can configure the management IP address subnet mask necessary for Switch management and DNS domain name server Port Setup This link takes you to screens where you can configure settings for individual ports Advanced Application VLAN This link takes you to screens where you can configure port based or 802 1Q VLAN depending on what you configured in the Switch Setup menu Static MAC This link takes you to screens where you can configure static MAC addresses for a Forwarding port These static MAC addresses do not age out Filtering This link takes you to a screen to set up filtering rules Spanning Tree This link takes you to screens where you can configure the RSTP or MSTP to Protocol prevent network loops Bandwidth This link takes you to screens where you can cap the maximum bandwidth allowed Control from specified source s to specified destination s Broadcast Storm This link takes you to a screen to set up broadcast filters Control Mirroring This link takes you to screens where you can copy traffic from one port or ports to another port in order that you can examine the traffic from the first port without interference Link Aggregation This link takes you to a screen where you can logically aggregate physical links to form one logical higher bandwidth link Port This link takes you to a screen where you can configure IEEE 802 1x port settings Authentication Port Security T
167. eature 25 1 DHCP Overview DHCP Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol RFC 2131 and RFC 2132 allows individual computers to obtain TCP IP configuration at start up from a server You can configure the Switch as a DHCP server or a DHCP relay agent When configured as a server the Switch provides the TCP IP configuration for the clients If you configure the Switch as a relay agent then the Switch forwards DHCP requests to DHCP server on your network If you don t configure the Switch as a DHCP server or relay agent then you must have a DHCP server in the broadcast domain of the client computers or else the client computers must be configured manually 25 1 1 DHCP Modes If there is already a DHCP server on your network then you can configure the Switch as a DHCP relay agent When the Switch receives a request from a computer on your network it contacts the DHCP server for the necessary IP information and then relays the assigned information back to the computer 25 1 2 DHCP Configuration Options The DHCP configuration on the Switch is divided into Global and VLAN screens The screen you should use for configuration depends on the DHCP services you want to offer the DHCP clients on your network Choose the configuration screen based on the following criteria Global The Switch forwards all DHCP requests to the same DHCP server VLAN The Switch is configured on a VLAN by VLAN basis The Switch can be configured to relay DHCP reque
168. ecify the SNMP version and community password values Version Select the SNMP version for the Switch The SNMP version on the Switch must match the version on the SNMP manager Choose SNMP version 2c v2c SNMP version 3 v3 or both v3v2c Note SNMP version 2c is backwards compatible with SNMP version 1 Get Community Enter the Get Community string which is the password for the incoming Get and GetNext requests from the management station The Get Community string is only used by SNMP managers using SNMP version 2c or lower Set Community Enter the Set Community which is the password for incoming Set requests from the management station The Set Community string is only used by SNMP managers using SNMP version 2c or lower Trap Community Enter the Trap Community string which is the password sent with each trap to the SNMP manager The Trap Community string is only used by SNMP managers using SNMP version 2c or lower Trap Destination Use this section to configure where to send SNMP traps from the Switch Version Specify the version of the SNMP trap messages IP Enter the IP addresses of up to four managers to send your SNMP traps to ES 2108 Series User s Guide Chapter 27 Access Control Table 84 Management gt Access Control gt SNMP continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Port Enter the port number upon which the manager listens for SNMP traps Usern
169. ect this check box to activate your rule You may temporarily deactivate a rule without deleting it by deselecting this check box Name Type a descriptive name up to 32 printable ASCII characters for this rule This is for identification purpose only MAC Type a MAC address in valid MAC address format that is six hexadecimal character pairs Packets from this MAC address which also match the VLAN identification number you enter in the VID field are dropped by the Switch VID Type the VLAN group identification number Packets which match the VLAN identification number and the MAC address you enter in the MAC field are dropped by the Switch ES 2108 Series User s Guide Chapter 10 Filtering Table 21 Advanced Application gt Filtering continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Add Click Add to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to reset the fields to your previous configuration Clear Click Clear to clear the fields to the factory defaults Index This field displays the index number of the rule Click an index number to change the settings Active This field displays Yes when the rule is activated and No when is it deactivated Name This field displays the descriptive n
170. ections 2 Configure static trunking Click Advanced Application gt Link Aggregation gt Link Aggregation Setting In this screen activate trunking group T1 and select the ports that should belong to this group as shown in the figure below Click Apply when you are done ES 2108 Series User s Guide 125 Chapter 15 Link Aggregation Figure 66 Trunking Example Configuration Screen Link Aggregation Setting 4 Status LACP Group ID Active T1 Vv T2 Port Group Apply Cancel Your trunk group 1 T1 configuration is now complete you do not need to go to any additional screens ES 2108 Series User s Guide Port Authentication This chapter describes the IEEE 802 1x authentication method setup 16 1 Port Authentication Overview Port authentication is a way to validate access to ports on the Switch to clients based on an external server authentication server The Switch supports IEEE 802 1x for port authentication With IEEE 802 1x an authentication server validates access to a port based on a username and password provided by the user IEEE 802 1x uses the RADIUS Remote Authentication Dial In User Service RFC 2138 2139 protocol to validate users See Section 20 2 1 on page 152 for more information on configuring your RADIUS server settings 16 1 1 IEEE 802 1x Authentication The following figure illustrates how a client connecting to a IEEE 802 1x authentication enabled port
171. ed to take adequate measures Taiwanese BSMI Bureau of Standards Metrology and Inspection A Warning See i8 E ARRAY Salem TERHEBUIRHSDSRINS RIBEXSEXATAR TER EIERN T ASS REE EE SHS Notices Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user s authority to operate the equipment This Class A digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES 003 Cet appareil num rique de la classe A est conforme la norme NMB 003 du Canada CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT APPAREIL A LASER DE CLASS 1 PRODUCT COMPLIES WITH 21 CFR 1040 10 AND 1040 11 PRODUIT CONFORME SELON 21 CFR 1040 10 ET 1040 11 Viewing Certifications 1 Goto http www zyxel com 2 Select your product on the ZyXEL home page to go to that product s page 3 Select the certification you wish to view from this page ZyXEL Limited Warranty ZyXEL warrants to the original end user purchaser that this product is free from any defects in materials or workmanship for a period of up to two years from the date of purchase During the warranty period and upon proof of purchase should the product have indications of failure due to faulty workmanship and or materials Zy XEL will at its discretion repair or replace the defective products or components without charge for either parts or labor and to whatever extent it shall deem necessary to restore the product or components to proper operating ES 2108 Series User s Guide
172. emory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to reset the above fields to your previous configuration Clear Click Clear to set the above fields back to the factory defaults Index This field displays the index number of the route Click a number to edit the static route entry Active This field displays Yes when the static route is activated and NO when it is deactivated Name This field displays the descriptive name for this route This is for identification purpose only ES 2108 Series User s Guide Chapter 23 Static Route Table 65 IP Application gt Static Routing continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Destination This field displays the IP network address of the final destination Address Subnet Mask This field displays the subnet mask for this destination Gateway This field displays the IP address of the gateway The gateway is an immediate Address neighbor of your Switch that will forward the packet to the destination Metric This field displays the cost of transmission for routing purposes Delete Click Delete to remove the selected entry from the summary table Cancel Click Cancel to clear the Delete check boxes ES 2108 Series User s Guide Chapter 23 Static Route ES 2108 Series User s Guide Differentiated Services This chapter shows you how to configure Differentiated Services DiffServ on the Switch 24 1 DiffServ Overview Quality
173. emperature unit Centigrade or Fahrenheit in this field Temperature CPU MAC and LOCAL refer to the location of the temperature sensors on the Switch printed circuit board Current This field displays the current temperature measured at this sensor MAX This field displays the maximum temperature measured at this sensor MIN This field displays the minimum temperature measured at this sensor Threshold This field displays the upper temperature limit at this sensor Status This field displays Normal for temperatures below the threshold and Error for those above Fan speed A properly functioning fan is an essential component along with a sufficiently RPM ventilated cool operating environment in order for the device to stay within the temperature threshold Each fan has a sensor that is capable of detecting and reporting if the fan speed falls below the threshold shown Current This field displays this fan s current speed in Revolutions Per Minute RPM MAX This field displays this fan s maximum speed measured in Revolutions Per Minute RPM MIN This field displays this fan s minimum speed measured in Revolutions Per Minute RPM lt 41 is displayed for speeds too small to measure under 2000 RPM Threshold This field displays the minimum speed at which a normal fan should work Status Normal indicates that this fan is functioning above the minimum speed Error indicates that this fan is functioning below the minimum speed Voltag
174. epting this certificate you should examine this site s certificate carefully Are you willing to to accept this certificate For the purpose of identifying the Web site ES 2024A 0013491ad4fa Examine Certificate Accept this certificate permanently Accept this certificate temporarily For this session Do not accept this certificate and do not connect to this Web site c o ES 2108 Series User s Guide 217 Chapter 27 Access Control Figure 132 Security Certificate 2 Netscape Server Certificate Expired x ES 20244 0013491ad4fa is a site that uses a security certificate to encrypt data during transmission but its certificate expired on 2 19 1924 1 39 AM You should check to make sure that your computer s time currently set to Thursday May 12 2005 17 46 00 is correct Would you like to continue anyway View Certificate Cancel Help 27 9 3 The Main Screen After you accept the certificate and enter the login username and password the Switch main screen appears The lock displayed in the bottom right of the browser status bar denotes a secure connection Figure 133 Example Lock Denoting a Secure Connection BEE le Edt view Favorites Tools Help EA r 993 9 9 gE 3 3 fires https 192 168 1 1 Go Save M Status H Logout H Help System Up Time 1 07 19 Port Link State LACP TxPkts RxPkts Errors Tx KB s RxKB s Up Time 3
175. ery port Select this when you connect an IGMP multicast server to the port Select Edge to stop the Switch from using the port as an IGMP query port The Switch will not keep any record of an IGMP router being connected to this port The Switch does not forward IGMP join or leave packets to this port Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to reset the fields 19 4 IGMP Snooping VLAN Click Advanced Application Multicast Multicast Setting IGMP Snooping VLAN link to display the screen as shown See Section 19 1 4 on page 138 for more information on IGMP Snooping VLAN ES 2108 Series User s Guide Chapter 19 Multicast Figure 75 Advanced Application gt Multicast gt Multicast Setting gt IGMP Snooping VLAN Mode QUST Multicast Setting auto fixed Apply Cancel VLAN Name VID Index Add Cancel Clear VID Delete Cancel Name Delete The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 44 Advanced Application gt Multicast gt Multicast Setting gt IGMP Snooping VLAN LABEL DESCRIPTION Mode Select auto to have the Switch learn multicast group membership i
176. es how to configure authentication and accounting settings on the Switch 20 1 Authentication Authorization and Accounting Authentication is the process of determining who a user is and validating access to the Switch The Switch can authenticate users who try to log in based on user accounts configured on the Switch itself The Switch can also use an external authentication server to authenticate a large number of users Authorization is the process of determining what a user is allowed to do Different user accounts may have higher or lower privilege levels associated with them For example user A may have the right to create new login accounts on the Switch but user B cannot The Switch can authorize users based on user accounts configured on the Switch itself or it can use an external server to authorize a large number of users Accounting is the process of recording what a user is doing The Switch can use an external server to track when users log in log out execute commands and so on Accounting can also record system related actions such as boot up and shut down times of the Switch The external servers that perform authentication authorization and accounting functions are known as AAA servers The Switch supports RADIUS Remote Authentication Dial In User Service see Section 20 1 2 on page 152 and TACACS Terminal Access Controller Access Control System Plus see Section 20 1 2 on page 152 as external authentication authorization
177. es the labels in this screen Table 9 Basic Setting gt System Info LABEL DESCRIPTION System Name This field displays the descriptive name of the Switch for identification purposes ZyNOS F W This field displays the version number of the Switch s current firmware including the Version date created ree This field refers to the Ethernet MAC Media Access Control address of the Switch ress PoE Status This section is only available on the PWR model Total Power This is the total power in Watts the PWR model can provide over the Ethernet W Consuming This field displays the amount of power the Switch is currently supplying to the Power W connected PoE enabled devices Remaining This field displays the amount of power the Switch can still provide for PoE Power W Note The Switch must have at least 16 W of remaining power in order to supply power to a PoE device even if the PoE device requested for a lower power supply than 16W ES 2108 Series User s Guide Chapter 7 Basic Setting Table 9 Basic Setting gt System Info continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Hardware Monitor The following hardware monitoring information is only available on the PWR model Temperature The Switch has temperature sensors that are capable of detecting and reporting if the Unit temperature rises above the threshold You may choose the t
178. ess 209 Table 85 Management gt Access Control gt SNMP gt Trap Group 211 Table 86 Management gt Access Control gt LOGINS entren ener nnn 212 Table 87 Management gt Access Control gt Service Access Control 219 Table 88 Management gt Access Control gt Remote Management ssssssssseeeees 220 Table 59 Management Diagnose spuotessseeretU s teeblieukt Fere tie beber dabo eere imde Lee diee or vedo d aueh be Didone Ee dH 221 Table 90 Syslog Severly Levels 25 55 mic arc ve dai Ea raa CERO CER KO A CUR Fai e n c KO d d Rd 223 Tae 91 Managementa y0 arasinan a buds capis cobra die cceu Gurt uad dat x cu du ue 224 Table 92 Management gt Syslog Server Setup coccccecsideacesocectsseeescucccdntecoehonenanst consarooniaieecneienweneeese 225 Table 93 ZyXEL Clustering Management Specifications ccccesseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeseseeeeeteaeeseeneeeees 227 Table 94 Management gt Cluster Management Status 229 Table 95 FIP Upload to Cluster Member Example i eere rere t nen ta etre t o pte pret eR pcs 230 Table 96 Management gt Cluster Management gt Configuration ssssssssseeeeeeees 231 Table 97 Management MAG Tablet iiucstiie exscr br pet a top acannon 234 Table 98 Management ARP TSBIB auusciosecupupr ona rrr cera nad Gv ga aa n cero gc ds 236 Tabie 93 Management Conigure D BERI susisuka 238 Table 100 Troubleshooting the Start Up of Your Switch eesssssss
179. every switch must receive information about topology changes before it starts to forward frames In addition each port needs time to listen for conflicting information that would make it return to a blocking state otherwise temporary data loops might result The allowed range is 4 to 30 seconds As a general rule Note 2 Forward Delay 1 gt Max Age gt 2 Hello Time 1 Maximum hops Enter the number of hops between 1 and 255 in an MSTP region before the BPDU is discarded and the port information is aged Configuration Name Enter a descriptive name up to 32 characters of an MST region Revision Number Enter a number to identify a region s configuration Devices must have the same revision number to belong to the same region Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh Instance Use this section to configure MSTI Multiple Spanning Tree Instance settings Instance Enter the number you want to use to identify this MST instance on the Switch The Switch supports instance numbers 0 16 Bridge Priority Set the priority of the Switch for the specific spanning tree instance The lower the number the more
180. for more background information Join Timer Join Timer sets the duration of the Join Period timer for GVRP in milliseconds Each port has a Join Period timer The allowed Join Time range is between 100 and 65535 milliseconds the default is 200 milliseconds See the chapter on VLAN setup for more background information Leave Timer Leave Time sets the duration of the Leave Period timer for GVRP in milliseconds Each port has a single Leave Period timer Leave Time must be two times larger than Join Timer the default is 600 milliseconds Leave All Timer Leave All Timer sets the duration of the Leave All Period timer for GVRP in milliseconds Each port has a single Leave All Period timer Leave All Timer must be larger than Leave Timer the default is 10000 milliseconds Priority Queue Assignment IEEE 802 1p defines up to eight separate traffic types by inserting a tag into a MAC layer frame that contains bits to define class of service Frames without an explicit priority tag are given the default priority of the ingress port Use the following fields to configure the priority level to physical queue mapping The Switch has eight physical queues that you can map to the eight priority levels On the Switch traffic assigned to higher index queues gets through faster while traffic in lower index queues is dropped if the network is congested Priority Level The following descriptions are based on the traffic types defined in t
181. forwarding behavior the PHB Per Hop Behavior that each packet gets across the DiffServ network Based on the marking rule different kinds of traffic can be marked for different priorities of forwarding Resources can then be allocated according to the DSCP values and the configured policies 24 1 2 DiffServ Network Example The following figure depicts a simple DiffServ network consisting of a group of contiguous DiffServ compliant network devices ES 2108 Series User s Guide Chapter 24 Differentiated Services Figure 106 DiffServ Network Example Switch A marks traffic flowing into the network based on the configured marking rules Intermediary network devices 1 and 2 allocate network resources such as bandwidth by mapping the DSCP values and the associated policies 24 2 Activating DiffServ Activate DiffServ to allow the Switch to enable DiffServ on the selected port s Click IP Application gt DiffServ in the navigation panel to display the screen as shown Figure 107 IP Application gt DiffServ Diffserv DSCP Setting Active C Port Active 1 m 2 3 3 7 4 r 5 6 C 7 n 8 a 9 C Apply Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 66 IP Application gt DiffServ LABEL DESCRIPTION Active Select this option to enable DiffServ on the Switch Port This field displays the index number of a port on the Switch ES 2108 Series
182. from the managers Encryption protects the contents of the SNMP messages When the contents of the SNMP messages are encrypted only the intended recipients can read them 27 3 2 Supported MIBs MIBs let administrators collect statistics and monitor status and performance The Switch supports the following MIBs SNMP MIB II RFC 1213 e RFC 1157 SNMP v1 RFC 1493 Bridge MIBs RFC 1643 Ethernet MIBs RFC 1155 SMI RFC 2674 SNMPv2 SNMPv2c RFC 1757 RMON SNMPv2 SNMPv2c or later version compliant with RFC 2011 SNMPv2 MIB for IP RFC 2012 SNMPv2 MIB for TCP RFC 2013 SNMPv2 MIB for UDP 27 3 3 SNMP Traps The Switch sends traps to an SNMP manager when an event occurs This table lists the beginnings of the private MIB trap OIDs for the various ES 2108 models An OID Object ID that begins with one of the numbers listed here is defined in the related model s private MIBs Otherwise it is a standard MIB OID Table 78 Private MIB OID Starting Numbers PRIVATE MIB OID START MODEL 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 18 ES 2108 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 29 ES 2108 F 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 22 ES 2108 LC 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 19 ES 2108 G 1 3 6 1 4 1 890 1 5 8 21 ES 2108PWR The following tables outline the SNMP traps by category For private MIBs the listed Object ID shows an X for the numbers that vary by model Refer to Table 78 on page 205 for the numbers that go with each model Table 79 SN
183. fter you make your selection click Apply top right of screen to display the screens as mentioned above You can still customize these settings by adding deleting incoming or outgoing ports but you must also click Apply at the bottom of the screen Incoming These are the ingress ports an ingress port is an incoming port that is a port through which a data packet enters If you wish to allow two subscriber ports to talk to each other you must define the ingress port for both ports The numbers in the top row denote the incoming port for the corresponding port listed on the left its outgoing port CPU refers to the Switch management port By default it forms a VLAN with all Ethernet ports If it does not form a VLAN with a particular port then the Switch cannot be managed from that port Outgoing These are the egress ports an egress port is an outgoing port that is a port through which a data packet leaves If you wish to allow two subscriber ports to talk to each other you must define the egress port for both ports CPU refers to the Switch management port By default it forms a VLAN with all Ethernet ports If it does not form a VLAN with a particular port then the Switch cannot be managed from that port Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non v
184. ge Resizing of gt Restore Defaults Cancel De 34 3 Problems with the Password Table 102 Troubleshooting the Password PROBLEM CORRECTIVE ACTION Switch password using the proper casing Cannot access the The password field is case sensitive Make sure that you enter the correct password The administrator username is admin The default administrator password is 1234 The username and password are case sensitive Make sure that you enter the correct password and username using the proper casing If you have changed the password and have now forgotten it you will need to upload the default configuration file This restores all of the factory defaults including the ES 2108 Series User s Guide 247 Chapter 34 Troubleshooting ES 2108 Series User s Guide Product Specifications The following tables summarize the Switch s hardware and firmware features Table 103 Hardware Specifications SPECIFICATION DESCRIPTION Dimensions ES 2108 ES 2108 LC ES 2108 G ES 2108 F 250mm W x 135mm D x 35mm H ES 2108PWR 250mm W x 234 8mm D x 44 45mm H Standard 19 rack mountable Weight ES 2108 ES 2108 L C ES 2108 G ES 2108 F 1 2 Kg ES 2108PWR 2 4 Kg Distance between the 129 5mm centers of the holes on the device s back Recommended type of M4 Tap Screw see Figure 157 on page 251 screws for wall mounting AC Model Power
185. gement BPDUS are received and processed Listening All BPDUs are received and processed Note The listening state does not exist in RSTP Learning All BPDUs are received and processed Information frames are submitted to the learning process but not forwarded Forwarding All BPDUs are received and processed All information frames are received and forwarded 11 1 4 Multiple STP Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol IEEE 802 1s is backward compatible with STP RSTP and addresses the limitations of existing spanning tree protocols STP and RSTP in networks to include the following features One Common and Internal Spanning Tree CIST that represents the entire network s connectivity Grouping of multiple bridges or switching devices into regions that appear as one single bridge on the network A VLAN can be mapped to a specific Multiple Spanning Tree Instance MSTI MSTI allows multiple VLANs to use the same spanning tree Load balancing is possible as traffic from different VLANS can use distinct paths in a region 11 1 4 1 MSTP Network Example The following figure shows a network example where two VLANs are configured on the two switches If the switches are using STP or RSTP the link for VLAN 2 will be blocked as STP and RSTP allow only one link in the network and block the redundant link ES 2108 Series User s Guide Chapter 11 Spanning Tree Protocol Figure 49 STP RSTP Network Example Wi
186. ges loop back to the switch and are re broadcast again and again causing a broadcast storm If a switch not in loop state connects to a switch in loop state then it will be affected by the switch in loop state in the following way t will receive broadcast messages sent out from the switch in loop state t will receive its own broadcast messages that it sends out as they loop back It will then re broadcast those messages again ES 2108 Series User s Guide Chapter 22 Loop Guard The following figure shows port N on switch A connected to switch B Switch B is in loop state When broadcast or multicast packets leave port N and reach switch B they are sent back to port N on A as they are rebroadcast from B Figure 99 Switch in Loop State The loop guard feature checks to see if a loop guard enabled port is connected to a switch in loop state This is accomplished by periodically sending a probe packet and seeing if the packet returns on the same port If this is the case the Switch will shut down the port connected to the switch in loop state The following figure shows a loop guard enabled port N on switch A sending a probe packet P to switch B Since switch B is in loop state the probe packet P returns to port N on A The Switch then shuts down port N to ensure that the rest of the network is not affected by the switch in loop state Figure 100 Loop Guard Probe Packet v LE
187. goes through a validation process The Switch prompts the client for login information in the form of a user name and password When the client provides the login credentials the Switch sends an authentication request to a RADIUS server The RADIUS server validates whether this client is allowed access to the port 2 Atthe time of writing IEEE 802 1x is not supported by all operating systems See your operating system documentation If your operating system does not support 802 1x then you may need to install 802 1x client software ES 2108 Series User s Guide Chapter 16 Port Authentication Figure 67 IEEE 802 1x Authentication Process a mm New Connection Login Info Request Login Credentials Q Authentication Request Authentication Reply Session Granted Denied 16 2 Port Authentication Configuration To enable port authentication first activate IEEE802 1x security both on the Switch and the port s then configure the RADIUS server settings Click Advanced Application gt Port Authentication in the navigation panel to display the screen as shown Figure 68 Advanced Application gt Port Authentication Fort Authentication J 802 1x Click here 16 2 1 Activate IEEE 802 1x Security Use this screen to activate IEEE 802 1x security From the Port Authentication screen display the configuration screen as shown ES 2108 Series User s Guide Chapter 16 Port Authentication
188. grak Noi Muang Nonthaburi 11000 Thailand Ukraine Support E mail support ua zyxel com Sales E mail sales ua zyxel com Telephone 380 44 247 69 78 Fax 380 44 494 49 32 Web www ua zyxel com Regular Mail ZyXEL Ukraine 13 Pimonenko Str Kiev 04050 Ukraine United Kingdom Support E mail support zyxel co uk Sales E mail sales zyxel co uk Telephone 44 1344 303044 08707 555779 UK only Fax 44 1344 303034 Web www zyxel co uk FTP ftp zyxel co uk Regular Mail ZyXEL Communications UK Ltd 11 The Courtyard Eastern Road Bracknell Berkshire RG12 2XB United Kingdom UK ES 2108 Series User s Guide 275 Appendix D Customer Support 276 ES 2108 Series User s Guide Index Symbols standby ports 121 Numerics 802 1P priority 83 A access control 203 limitation 203 login account 211 remote management 219 service port 218 SNMP 204 accounting setup 156 accounts creating with web configurator 56 Address Resolution Protocol ARP 235 237 238 administrator password 212 age 111 aggregator ID 122 123 124 aging time 77 allowing pop up windows 242 alternative subnet mask notation 259 American Wire Gauge 249 applications backbone 31 bridging 32 IEEE 802 1Q VLAN 33 switched workgroup 33 ARP 235 how it works 235 view 235 ARP inspection 165 and MAC filter 166 configuring 166 syslog messages 166 trusted ports 166 authentication and RADIUS 1
189. gt MVR to display the screen as shown next You can create up to three multicast VLANs and up to 256 multicast rules on the Switch Your Switch automatically creates a static VLAN with the same VID when you create a multicast VLAN in this screen Figure 79 Advanced Application gt Multicast gt Multicast Setting gt MVR 4 OLY aD Multicast Setting Group Configuration Active E Name Multicast VLAN ID 802 1p Priority 0 j Mode Dynamic C Compatible Port Source Port Receiver Port None Tagging None j C 1 C C Ce PI 2 e CI r5 3 e e Ol a 4 C Cc CI B 5 C e I C 6 C e CI D 7 C O e a 8 C e I Ci 9 C C Ce r1 Add Cancel VLAN Active Name Mode Source Port Receiver Port 802 1p Delete Delete Cancel The following table describes the related labels in this screen Table 46 Advanced Application gt Multicast gt Multicast Setting gt MVR LABEL DESCRIPTION Active Select this check box to enable MVR to allow one single multicast VLAN to be shared among different subscriber VLANs on the network Name Enter a descriptive name up to 32 printable ASCII characters for identification purposes ES 2108 Series User s Guide Chapter 19 Multicast Table 46 Advanced Application gt Multicast gt Multicast Setting gt MVR continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Multicast VLAN Enter the VLAN ID 1 to 4094 of the multicast VLAN ID 802 1p Priority Select a priority
190. h MSTP a switch can set up more than one spanning tree In addition more than one VLAN can exist in a spanning tree Loop Guard Use the loop guard feature to protect against network loops on the edge of your network IP Source Guard Use IP source guard to filter unauthorized ARP packets in your network Link Aggregation Link aggregation trunking is the grouping of physical ports into one logical higher capacity link You may want to trunk ports if for example it is cheaper to use multiple lower speed links than to under utilize a high speed but more costly single port link Port Authentication and Security For security the Switch allows authentication using IEEE 802 1x with an external RADIUS server and port security that allows only packets with dynamically learned MAC addresses and or configured static MAC addresses to pass through a port on the Switch Authentication and Accounting The Switch supports authentication and accounting services via RADIUS and TACACS AAA servers Device Management Use the web configurator or commands to easily configure the rich range of features on the Switch Port Cloning Use the port cloning feature to copy the settings you configure on one port to another port or ports Syslog The Switch can generate syslog messages and send it to a syslog Server ES 2108 Series User s Guide Appendix A Product Specifications Table 104 Firmwar
191. hared Secret Specify a password up to 32 alphanumeric characters as the key to be shared between the external TACACS accounting server and the Switch This key is not sent over the network This key must be the same on the external TACACS accounting server and the Switch Delete Check this box if you want to remove an existing TACACS accounting server entry from the Switch This entry is deleted when you click Apply Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh 20 2 3 Authentication and Accounting Setup Use this screen to configure authentication and accounting settings on the Switch Click on the Auth and Acct Setup link in the Authentication and Accounting screen to view the screen as shown ES 2108 Series User s Guide Chapter 20 Authentication amp Accounting Figure 89 Advanced Application gt Auth and Acct gt Auth and Acct Setup Authentication Type Privilege Enable Login Accounting Update Period _ Auth andAcctSetup o minutes Type Active Broadcast Mode Method Privilege System O E radius gt Exec O 0 start stop v radius gt Dotlx O O startstop radius
192. he IEEE 802 1d standard which incorporates the 802 1p Level 7 Typically used for network control traffic such as router configuration messages Level 6 Typically used for voice traffic that is especially sensitive to jitter jitter is the variations in delay Level 5 Typically used for video that consumes high bandwidth and is sensitive to jitter Level 4 Typically used for controlled load latency sensitive traffic such as SNA Systems Network Architecture transactions Level 3 Typically used for excellent effort or better than best effort and would include important business traffic that can tolerate some delay Level 2 This is for spare bandwidth Level 1 This is typically used for non critical background traffic such as bulk transfers that are allowed but that should not affect other applications and users Level 0 Typically used for best effort traffic ES 2108 Series User s Guide Chapter 7 Basic Setting Table 11 Basic Setting gt Switch Setup continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to reset the fields to your previous configuration 7 6 IP Setup Click
193. hen click Advanced Application gt VLAN in the navigation panel to display the next screen ES 2108 Series User s Guide Chapter 8 VLAN Figure 45 Advanced Application gt VLAN Port Based VLAN Setup All Connected 2 S o o T z z u a u B Abb or 3 Eb Z d gt gt gt gt e Eb 8 g E z of Pipini 2 bbb 8 E z 8 BERBR ss a aE S e 5 3 IS sss gt immm m F gt liS E gt e 3333 A E ccce EB c o 5 5 E 3 e s 1313 5E S 5 ccs cC PEE oll R RRR D o kal ERR mm m 2 oli ES D T e e 31313 5E z gt o o c AADA a anma n onm wa eo M ono n co o o B a 2 5 e E 3 u 8 8 ES 2108 Series User s Guide Chapter 8 VLAN The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 19 Advanced Application gt VLAN Port Based VLAN Setup LABEL DESCRIPTION Setting Wizard Choose All connected or Port isolation All connected means all ports can communicate with each other that is there are no virtual LANs All incoming and outgoing ports are selected This option is the most flexible but also the least secure Port isolation means that each port can only communicate with the CPU management port and cannot communicate with each other All incoming ports are selected while only the CPU outgoing port is selected This option is the most limiting but also the most secure A
194. hernet port has a CFI set to 1 then that frame should not be forwarded as it is to an untagged port The remaining twelve bits define the VLAN ID giving a possible maximum number of 4 096 212 VLANs Note that user priority and VLAN ID are independent of each other A frame with VID VLAN Identifier of null 0 is called a priority frame meaning that only the priority level is significant and the default VID of the ingress port is given as the VID of the frame Of the 4096 possible VIDs a VID of 0 is used to identify priority frames and value 4095 FFF is reserved so the maximum possible VLAN configurations are 4 094 TPID User Priority CFI VLAN ID 2 Bytes 3 Bits 1Bit 12 bits 8 1 1 Forwarding Tagged and Untagged Frames Each port on the Switch is capable of passing tagged or untagged frames To forward a frame from an 802 1Q VLAN aware switch to an 802 1Q VLAN unaware switch the Switch first decides where to forward the frame and then strips off the VLAN tag To forward a frame from an 802 1Q VLAN unaware switch to an 802 1Q VLAN aware switch the Switch first decides where to forward the frame and then inserts a VLAN tag reflecting the ingress port s default VID The default PVID is VLAN 1 for all ports but this can be changed ES 2108 Series User s Guide Chapter 8 VLAN 8 2 Automatic VLAN Registration GARP and GVRP are the protocols used to automatically register VLAN membership across switches 8 2 1 GARP GARP Gene
195. his link takes you to a screen where you can activate MAC address learning and set the maximum number of MAC addresses to learn on a port Queuing Method This link takes you to a screen where you can configure queuing with associated queue weights Multicast This link takes you to a screen where you can configure multicast settings IGMP filters and multicast VLAN groups Auth and Acct This link takes you to a screen where you can configure authentication and accounting services via external servers The external servers can be either RADIUS Remote Authentication Dial In User Service or TACACS Terminal Access Controller Access Control System Plus IP Source Guard This link takes you to a screen where you can configure filtering of unauthorized DHCP and ARP packets in your network Loop Guard This link takes you to a screen where you can configure protection against network loops that occur on the edge of your network IP Application ES 2108 Series User s Guide 55 Chapter 4 The Web Configurator Table 6 Navigation Panel Links continued LINK DESCRIPTION Static Route This link takes you to screens where you can configure static routes A static route defines how the Switch should forward traffic by configuring the TCP IP parameters manually DiffServ This link takes you to screens where you can enable DiffServ and set DSCP to IEEE802 1p mappings DHCP This li
196. his screen Table 50 Advanced Application gt Auth and Acct gt TACACS Server Setup LABEL DESCRIPTION Authentication Use this section to configure your TACACS authentication settings Server Mode This field is only valid if you configure multiple TACACS servers Select index priority and the Switch tries to authenticate with the first configured TACACS server if the TACACS server does not respond then the Switch tries to authenticate with the second TACACS server Select round robin to alternate between the TACACS servers that it sends authentication requests to Timeout Specify the amount of time in seconds that the Switch waits for an authentication request response from the TACACS server If you are using index priority for your authentication and you are using two TACACS servers then the timeout value is divided between the two TACACS servers For example if you set the timeout value to 30 seconds then the Switch waits for a response from the first TACACS server for 15 seconds and then tries the second TACACS server Index This is a read only number representing a TACACS server entry IP Address Enter the IP address of an external TACACS server in dotted decimal notation TCP Port The default port of a TACACS server for authentication is 49 You need not change this value unless your network administrator instructs you to do so ES 2108 Series User s Guide pss Cha
197. ication is generally considered stronger than MD5 but is slower Privacy Specify the encryption method for SNMP communication from this user You can choose one of the following DES Data Encryption Standard is a widely used but breakable method of data encryption It applies a 56 bit key to each 64 bit block of data e AES Advanced Encryption Standard is another method for data encryption that also uses a secret key AES applies a 128 bit key to 128 bit blocks of data Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh 27 3 5 Configuring SNMP Trap Group From the SNMP screen click Trap Group to view the screen as shown Use the Trap Group screen to specify the types of SNMP traps that should be sent to each SNMP manager ES 2108 Series User s Guide Chapter 27 Access Control Figure 124 Management gt Access Control gt SNMP gt Trap Group Irap Group J SNMP Setting Trap Destination IP x Type Options System coldstart warmstart M fanspeed temperature voltage M reset timesync intrusionlock loopguard Interface linkup linkdown autonegotiation AMAA 7 authenticat
198. ices that you want to allow to access the Switch Service Port For Telnet SSH FTP HTTP or HTTPS services you may change the default service port by typing the new port number in the Server Port field If you change the default port number then you will have to let people who wish to use the service know the new port number for that service Timeout Type how many minutes a management session via the web configurator can be left idle before the session times out After it times out you have to log in with your password again Very long idle time outs may have security risks Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh 27 11 Remote Management From the Access Control screen display the Remote Management screen as shown next You can specify a group of one or more trusted computers from which an administrator may use a service to manage the Switch Click Access Control to return to the Access Control Screen ES 2108 Series User s Guide Chapter 27 Access Control Figure 135 Management gt Access Control gt Remote Management Entry Active 1 Iv 2 O 3 O 4 E Leno Secured Client Setup Acce
199. in seconds between BPDU Bridge Protocol Data Units configuration message generations by the root switch The allowed range is 1 to 10 seconds ES 2108 Series User s Guide Chapter 11 Spanning Tree Protocol Table 25 Advanced Application gt Spanning Tree Protocol gt RSTP continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Max Age This is the maximum time in seconds a switch can wait without receiving a BPDU before attempting to reconfigure All switch ports except for designated ports should receive BPDUs at regular intervals Any port that ages out STP information provided in the last BPDU becomes the designated port for the attached LAN If it is a root port a new root port is selected from among the switch ports attached to the network The allowed range is 6 to 40 seconds Forwarding Delay This is the maximum time in seconds a switch will wait before changing states This delay is required because every switch must receive information about topology changes before it starts to forward frames In addition each port needs time to listen for conflicting information that would make it return to a blocking state otherwise temporary data loops might result The allowed range is 4 to 30 seconds As a general rule Note 2 Forward Delay 1 gt Max Age gt 2 Hello Time 1 Port This field displays the port number li Settings in this row apply to all ports Use this ro
200. incoming frame index number MAC Address This is the MAC address of the device from which this incoming frame came VID This is the VLAN group to which this frame belongs Port This is the port from which the above MAC address was learned This field displays drop if you configure a filter rule for the MAC address in the Filtering screen Type This shows whether the MAC address is dynamic learned by the Switch or static manually entered in the Static MAC Forwarding screen ES 2108 Series User s Guide ARP Table This chapter introduces ARP Table 32 1 ARP Table Overview Address Resolution Protocol ARP is a protocol for mapping an Internet Protocol address IP address to a physical machine address also known as a Media Access Control or MAC address on the local area network An IP version 4 address is 32 bits long In an Ethernet LAN MAC addresses are 48 bits long The ARP Table maintains an association between each MAC address and its corresponding IP address 32 1 1 How ARP Works When an incoming packet destined for a host device on a local area network arrives at the Switch the Switch s ARP program looks in the ARP Table and if it finds the address sends it to the device If no entry is found for the IP address ARP broadcasts the request to all the devices on the LAN The Switch fills in its own MAC and IP address in the sender address fields and puts the known IP address of the target in the target
201. ion accounting IP D ping traceroute Switch 7 stp mactable rmon Apply Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 85 Management gt Access Control gt SNMP gt Trap Group LABEL DESCRIPTION Trap Destination Select one of your configured trap destination IP addresses These are the IP IP addresses of the SNMP managers You must first configure a trap destination IP address in the SNMP Setting screen Use the rest of the screen to select which traps the Switch sends to that SNMP manager Type Select the categories of SNMP traps that the Switch is to send to the SNMP manager Options Select the individual SNMP traps that the Switch is to send to the SNMP station See Section 27 3 3 on page 205 for individual trap descriptions The traps are grouped by category Selecting a category automatically selects all of the category s traps Clear the check boxes for individual traps that you do not want the Switch to send to the SNMP station Clearing a category s check box automatically clears all of the category s trap check boxes the Switch only sends traps from selected categories Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel
202. iority Queuing SPQ 135 subnet 257 subnet mask 258 subnetting 260 switch lockout 57 switch reset 58 switch setup 76 switching 253 syntax conventions 4 syslog 166 223 protocol 223 server setup 224 settings 223 setup 223 severity levels 223 system information 71 system log 221 system reboot 199 T TACACS 152 setup 154 TACACS Terminal Access Controller Access Control System Plus 151 tagged VLAN 87 temperature 250 time current 74 time zone 75 timeserver 74 Time RFC 868 74 time service protocol 74 time format 74 time zone 75 timeserver 74 trademarks 267 traffic priority 77 transceiver installation 44 removal 45 traps destination 209 troubleshooting 241 accessing the switch 241 accessing the web configurator 241 password problems 247 start up 241 trunk group 121 trunking 121 253 example 125 trusted ports ARP inspection 166 Tunnel Protocol Attribute and RADIUS 160 Type of Service ToS 185 U untrusted ports ARP inspection 166 user profiles 151 UTC Universal Time Coordinated 75 V Vendor Specific Attribute See VSA ventilation 37 ES 2108 Series User s Guide Index ventilation holes 37 38 39 version viewing 72 VID 80 87 90 91 number of possible VIDs 87 priority frame 87 VID VLAN Identifier 87 VLAN 75 87 253 acceptable frame type 93 all connected 96 automatic registration 88 ID 87 ingress filtering 93 introduction 75 number of VLANs 90 port isolation 93
203. is disconnected Offline shows approximately 1 5 minutes after the link between cluster member and manager goes down 30 2 1 Cluster Member Switch Management Go to the Clustering Management Status screen of the cluster manager switch and then select an Index hyperlink from the list of members to go to that cluster member switch s web configurator home page This cluster member web configurator home page and the home page that you d see if you accessed it directly are different Figure 141 Cluster Management Cluster Member Web Configurator Screen ZyXEL Status a Logout B Help Basic Setting ES 4024AJES 40247 Member Menu Advanced Application IP Application ic setti Advanced Applications Routing Protocol Manageme Vereen VLAN Static Routing Maintenance Buracri General Setup Static MAC Forward RIP Diagnostic Switch Setup Filtering IGMP MAC Table IP Setup Spanning Tree Protocol DVMRP IP Table Port Setup Bandwidth Control OSPF ARP Table Maintenance Access Control FITURESONT Broadcast Storm Control Routing Table Diagnostic Mirroring DHCP Server Status Cluster Management Link Aggregation Port Status MAC Table Port Authentication IP Table Port Security ARP Table DHCP Access Control Routing Table Classifier ES 2108 Series User s Guide 229 Chapter 30 Cluster Management 30 2 1 1 Uploading Firmware to a Cluster Member Switch You can u
204. is is the time in seconds the root switch will wait before changing states that is listening to learning to forwarding Note The listening state does not exist in RSTP Cost to Bridge This is the path cost from the root port on this Switch to the root switch Changed Times Port ID This is the priority and number of the port on the Switch through which this Switch must communicate with the root of the Spanning Tree Topology This is the number of times the spanning tree has been reconfigured Time Since Last Change This is the time since the spanning tree was last reconfigured 11 6 Configure Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol To configure MSTP click MSTP in the Advanced Application gt Spanning Tree Protocol screen See Section 11 1 4 on page 103 for more information on MSTP ES 2108 Series User s Guide Chapter 11 Spanning Tree Protocol Figure 57 Advanced Application gt Spanning Tree Protocol gt MSTP pannin Status Active O Hello Time e seconds MAX Age 20 seconds Forwarding Delay fi 5 seconds Maximum hops fi 28 Configuration Name foo 349000001 Revision Number o Apply Cancel Instance Instance Bridge Priority 32768 J VLAN Range Start End Add Remove Clear Enabled VLAN s za Port Active Prority Path Cost r NE 1 O fi 28 fi g 2 m fi 28 fi g 3 O fi 28 fi g 4 m fi 28 fi g 5 O 128 fi g 6 O 128 fi g 7 O 128 fi g 8 O 128 fi g g O 128
205. it VLAN groups beyond the local Switch Port Isolation Port Isolation allows each port to communicate only with the CPU management port and the uplink ports but not communicate with each other This option is the most limiting but also the most secure Ingress Check Select this check box to activate ingress filtering on the Switch Clear this check box to disable ingress filtering the Switch Port This field displays the port number B Settings in this row apply to all ports Use this row only if you want to make some settings the same for all ports Use this row first to set the common settings and then make adjustments on a port by port basis Note Changes in this row are copied to all the ports as soon as you make them PVID Enter a number between 1and 4094 as the port VLAN ID GVRP Select this check box to allow GVRP on this port Acceptable Specify the type of frames allowed on a port Choices are All and Tag Only Frame Type Select All from the drop down list box to accept all untagged or tagged frames on this port This is the default setting Select Tag Only to accept only tagged frames on this port All untagged frames will be dropped VLAN Trunking Enable VLAN Trunking on ports connected to other switches or routers but not ports directly connected to end users to allow frames belonging to unknown VLAN ES 2108 Series User s Guide groups to pass through the Switch Chapter
206. k Tools Internet Options and then the Security tab Figure 152 Internet Options General Security Privacy Content Connections Programs Advanced Select a Web content zone to specify its security settings AG E O Internet Local intranet Trusted sites Restricted sites Internet This zone contains all Web sites you haven t placed in other zones r Security level for this zone Move the slider to set the security level for this zone E Medium Safe browsing and still functional Prompts before downloading potentially unsafe content Unsigned ActiveX controls will not be downloaded Appropriate for most Internet sites q Custom Level b Default Level OK Cancel Apply Click the Custom Level button Scroll down to Scripting Under Active scripting make sure that Enable is selected the default Under Scripting of Java applets make sure that Enable is selected the default Click OK to close the window oa fF WOW ND ES 2108 Series User s Guide 245 Chapter 34 Troubleshooting Figure 153 Security Settings Java Scripting Settings 125 Scripting 3 poe a E Allow paste operations via script O Disable 9 Enable Q Prompt amp SURG of Java applets OQ Prompt Lleaw Aukhantiostian z Reset custom settings Reset to Medium Reset a se 34 2 1 3 Java Permissions 1 From Inte
207. layed as Error in the Cluster Management Status screen and a warning icon appears in the member summary list below Name Type a name to identify the Clustering Manager You may use up to 32 printable characters spaces are allowed VID This is the VLAN ID and is only applicable if the Switch is set to 802 1Q VLAN All switches must be directly connected and in the same VLAN group to belong to the same cluster Switches that are not in the same VLAN group are not visible in the Clustering Candidates list This field is ignored if the Clustering Manager is using Port based VLAN Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this part of the screen afresh Clustering Candidate The following fields relate to the switches that are potential cluster members ES 2108 Series User s Guide Chapter 30 Cluster Management Table 96 Management gt Cluster Management gt Configuration continued LABEL DESCRIPTION List A list of suitable candidates found by auto discovery is shown here The switches must be directly connected Directly connected switches that are set to be cluster managers wi
208. level 0 7 with which the Switch replaces the priority in outgoing IGMP control packets belonging to this multicast VLAN Mode Specify the MVR mode on the Switch Choices are Dynamic and Compatible Select Dynamic to send IGMP reports to all MVR source ports in the multicast VLAN Select Compatible to set the Switch not to send IGMP reports Port This field displays the port number on the Switch Settings in this row apply to all ports Use this row only if you want to make some settings the same for all ports Use this row first to set the common settings and then make adjustments on a port by port basis Note Changes in this row are copied to all the ports as soon as you make them Source Port Select this option to set this port as the MVR source port that sends and receives multicast traffic All source ports must belong to a single multicast VLAN Receiver Port Select this option to set this port as a receiver port that only receives multicast traffic None Select this option to set the port not to participate in MVR No MVR multicast traffic is sent or received on this port Tagging Select this check box if you want the port to tag the VLAN ID in all outgoing frames transmitted Add Click Add to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save y
209. likely the Switch will be chosen as the root bridge within the spanning tree instance Enter priority values between 0 and 61440 in increments of 4096 thus valid values are 0 4096 8192 12288 16384 20480 24576 28672 32768 36864 40960 45056 49152 53248 57344 and 61440 ES 2108 Series User s Guide Eu Chapter 11 Spanning Tree Protocol Table 27 Advanced Application gt Spanning Tree Protocol gt MSTP continued LABEL DESCRIPTION VLAN Range Enter the start of the VLAN ID range that you want to add or remove from the VLAN range edit area in the Start field Enter the end of the VLAN ID range that you want to add or remove from the VLAN range edit area in the End field Next click Add to add this range of VLAN s to be mapped to the MST instance Remove to remove this range of VLAN s from being mapped to the MST instance e Clear to remove all VLAN s from being mapped to this MST instance Enabled VLAN s This field displays which VLAN s are mapped to this MST instance Port This field displays the port number Settings in this row apply to all ports Use this row only if you want to make some settings the same for all ports Use this row first to set the common settings and then make adjustments on a port by port basis Note Changes in this row are copied to all the ports as soon as you make them Active Select this check box to add this port to the MST ins
210. ll not be visible in the Clustering Candidate list Switches that are not in the same management VLAN group will not be visible in the Clustering Candidate list Password Each cluster member s password is its web configurator password Select a member in the Clustering Candidate list and then enter its web configurator password If that switch administrator changes the web configurator password afterwards then it cannot be managed from the Cluster Manager Its Status is displayed as Error in the Cluster Management Status screen and a warning icon appears in the member summary list below If multiple devices have the same password then hold SHIFT and click those switches to select them Then enter their common web configurator password Add Click Add to save your settings to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this part of the screen afresh Refresh Click Refresh to perform auto discovery again to list potential cluster members The next summary table shows the information for the clustering members configured Index This is the index number of a cluster member switch MacAddr This is the cluster member switch s hardware MAC address Name This is the cluster member switch s System Name Model This is the cl
211. llows the configuration section for each STP mode Click Configuration to activate one of the STP standards on the Switch 11 3 Spanning Tree Configuration Use the Spanning Tree Configuration screen to activate one of the STP modes on the Switch Click Configuration in the Advanced Application gt Spanning Tree Protocol Figure 54 Advanced Application gt Spanning Tree Protocol gt Configuration a panning Iree Configuration Status Rapid Spanning Tree Spanning Tree Mode C Multiple Spanning Tree Apply Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 24 Advanced Application gt Spanning Tree Protocol gt Configuration LABEL DESCRIPTION Spanning Tree You can activate one of the STP modes on the Switch Mode Select Rapid Spanning Tree or Multiple Spanning Tree See Section 11 1 on page 101 for background information on STP Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh ES 2108 Series User s Guide Chapter 11 Spanning Tree Protocol 11 4 Configure Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol Use this screen to configure RSTP settings see Section 11 1 on page 101 for more information on R
212. lorer select Tools Internet Options Privacy 2 Clear the Block pop ups check box in the Pop up Blocker section of the screen This disables any web pop up blockers you may have enabled ES 2108 Series User s Guide Chapter 34 Troubleshooting Figure 149 Internet Options Internet Options PIR General Security Privacy Content Connections Programs Advanced Settings f Move the slider to select a privacy setting for the Internet RE zone Medium Blocks third party cookies that do not have a compact privacy policy Blocks third party cookies that use personally identifiable LJ information without your implicit consent Restricts first party cookies that use personally identifiable information without implicit consent Pop up Blocker Prevent most pop up windows from appearing C Block pop up 3 Click Apply to save this setting 34 2 1 1 2 Enable pop up Blockers with Exceptions Alternatively if you only want to allow pop up windows from your device see the following steps 1 In Internet Explorer select Tools Internet Options and then the Privacy tab 2 Select Settings to open the Pop up Blocker Settings screen ES 2108 Series User s Guide Chapter 34 Troubleshooting Figure 150 Internet Options Internet Options General Security Privacy Content Connections Programs Advanced Settings e Move the slider to select a privacy setting for
213. m Events NAS IP Address NAS Identifier Acct Status Type Acct Session ID The format of Acct Session Id is date time 8 digit sequential number for example 2007041917210300000001 date 2007 04 19 time 17 21 03 serial number 00000001 Acct Delay Time ES 2108 Series User s Guide Chapter 20 Authentication amp Accounting 20 3 2 2 Attributes Used for Accounting Exec Events The attributes are listed in the following table along with the time that they are sent the difference between Console and Telnet SSH Exec events is that the Telnet SSH events utilize the Calling Station Id attribute Table 54 RADIUS Attributes Exec Events via Console ATTRIBUTE START INTERIM UPDATE STOP User Name w NAS Identifier NAS IP Address Service Type Acct Status Type Acct Delay Time Acct Session ld Acct Authentic MIV Oo MO MO DM MO oO Acct Session Time oO oOo 9 MO MO MO OM v Acct Terminate Cause Oo om oO MO MO MO MO MO vj ov Table 55 RADIUS Attributes Exec Events via Telnet SSH ATTRIBUTE START INTERIM UPDATE STOP User Name a NAS Identifier NAS IP Address Service Type Calling Station Id Acct Status Type Acct Delay Time Acct Session ld Acct Authentic Oo mo oo om Oo 9 OM DM o Acct Session Time MIV oO MO MO MO MO vj ov Acct Terminate Cause
214. mes transmitted Untagged Ports belonging to the specified don t tag all outgoing frames transmitted VLAN Port Port VID This is the VLAN ID assigned to untagged frames that this port received Acceptable frame You may choose to accept both tagged and untagged type incoming frames or just tagged incoming frames on a port Ingress filtering If set the Switch discards incoming frames for VLANs that do not have this port as a member ES 2108 Series User s Guide Chapter 8 VLAN 8 3 Port VLAN Trunking Enable VLAN Trunking on a port to allow frames belonging to unknown VLAN groups to pass through that port This is useful if you want to set up VLAN groups on end devices without having to configure the same VLAN groups on intermediary devices Refer to the following figure Suppose you want to create VLAN groups 1 and 2 V1 and V2 on devices A and B Without VLAN Trunking you must configure VLAN groups and 2 on all intermediary switches C D and E otherwise they will drop frames with unknown VLAN group tags However with VLAN Trunking enabled on a port s in each intermediary switch you only need to create VLAN groups in the end devices A and B C D and E automatically allow frames with VLAN group tags 1 and 2 VLAN groups that are unknown to those switches to pass through their VLAN trunking port s Figure 39 Port VLAN Trunking c E Sie iia D B V v2 Nem v 8 4 Select the VLAN
215. n Click Management Access Control in the navigation panel to display the main screen as shown Figure 121 Access Control Access Control aD SNMP Click Here Logins Click Here Serice Access Control Click Here Remote Management Click Here Use these links to configure remote management options and create user accounts on the Switch ES 2108 Series User s Guide Chapter 27 Access Control 27 3 About SNMP Simple Network Management Protocol SNMP is an application layer protocol used to manage and monitor TCP IP based devices SNMP is used to exchange management information between the network management system NMS and a network element NE A manager station can manage and monitor the Switch through the network via SNMP version one SNMPv1 SNMP version 2c or SNMP version 3 The next figure illustrates an SNMP management operation SNMP is only available if TCP IP is configured Figure 122 SNMP Management Model Manager zin Agent Agent Agent Managed Device Managed Device Managed Device An SNMP managed network consists of two main components agents and a manager An agent is a management software module that resides in a managed switch the Switch An agent translates the local management information from the managed switch into a form compatible with SNMP The manager is the console through which network administrators perform network management functions It executes applications th
216. n the Static VLAN Screen Elapsed Time This field shows how long it has been since a normal VLAN was registered or a static VLAN was set up Status This field shows how this VLAN was added to the Switch dynamic using GVRP static added as a permanent entry or it shows other added using Multicast VLAN Registration MVR Change Pages Click Previous or Next to show the previous next screen if all status information cannot be seen in one screen 8 5 2 Static VLAN Details Use this screen to view detailed port settings and status of the VLAN group See Section 8 1 on page 87 for more information on static VLANs Click on an index number in the VLAN Status screen to display VLAN details Figure 42 Advanced Application gt VLAN gt VLAN Detail ORENEAN VLAN Status Port Number VID Z 4 6 8 Elapsed Time Status 1 3 5 7 9 U U U U j 1 0 47 03 Static Uu U U U ES 2108 Series User s Guide Chapter 8 VLAN The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 16 Advanced Application gt VLAN gt VLAN Details LABEL DESCRIPTION VLAN Status Click this to go to the VLAN Status screen VID This is the VLAN identification number that was configured in the Static VLAN screen Port Number This column displays the ports that are participating in a VLAN A tagged port is marked as T an untagged port is marked as U and ports not participating in a VLAN are
217. nagement SATUS ausseecasiskk erc err n abe d a cria ec tla aac Re 228 30 2 1 Cluster Member Switch Management ssssssssssssseseeneeee nennen 229 30 3 Clustering Management Configuratio eese ecce conie ramcn Rp epe rcu xxu pe eR ek aaa 230 Chapter 31 irem i 233 FETHA TUE 1 co emer TT 233 31 2 Viewing iie MAG TADIG oeicosisasteretuse cate nemus mie pter en pui cuse e e Edu seca esed rada rbv Re E EU ERR EE dus 234 Chapter 32 ARP TADIG m iE anii 235 3a TARE AE aiao ia aa kaaa Raa AEA aa ad E EES a cul a 235 ee al PURE ARF WTC pa casas egal dae ULT 235 eee i r rsWi Tia WMS eR 235 Chapter 33 de D Cloe feel 237 33 1 AORN LIS Cone SEIS aspicias baci did brer E udo bee eai a isque 237 Part VI Troubleshooting and Appendices 239 Chapter 34 Hu Ee P A 241 v m aser Slantmo Up the perire aa EE 241 24 7 Problems Accessin Tha SW 2s perta oar ea A a 241 34 2 1 Pop up Windows JavaScripts and Java Permissions sssesssssss 242 34 4 Problems with Tha Passwort 12e ett ttn Pedum EFttdpRRx EE d nU RE E aaa 247 Appendix A Product Specie aU DR ode acretix pieta pte edn DA ADM Optra T RT LU 249 Appendix B IP Addresses and Subnetting sessseseesesseeeeeeneeen
218. ncel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 91 Management gt Syslog LABEL DESCRIPTION Syslog Select Active to turn on syslog system logging and then configure the syslog setting Logging Type This column displays the names of the categories of logs that the device can generate Active Select this option to set the device to generate logs for the corresponding category Facility The log facility allows you to send logs to different files in the syslog server Refer to the documentation of your syslog program for more details Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to reset the fields 29 3 Syslog Server Setup Click Management gt Syslog gt Syslog Server Setup to open the following screen Use this screen to configure a list of external syslog servers ES 2108 Series User s Guide Chapter 29 Syslog Figure 138 Management gt Syslog gt Server Setup XVYHBUIDEDELDEDUT Syslog Setup Active C Server Address 0 0 0 0 Log Level Level 0 Add Cancel Clear Index Active IP Address Log Level Delete Delete Cancel The following table describes the labels in
219. ncel MVLAN Name Start Address End Address Delete All Delete Group Delete Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 47 Advanced Application gt Multicast gt Multicast Setting gt MVR gt Group Configuration LABEL DESCRIPTION Multicast Select a multicast VLAN ID that you configured in the MVR screen from the drop VLAN ID down list box Name Enter a descriptive name for identification purposes Start Address Enter the starting IP multicast address of the multicast group in dotted decimal notation Refer to Section 19 1 1 on page 137 for more information on IP multicast addresses End Address Enter the ending IP multicast address of the multicast group in dotted decimal notation Enter the same IP address as the Start Address field if you want to configure only one IP address for a multicast group Refer to Section 19 1 1 on page 137 for more information on IP multicast addresses Add Click Add to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to reset the fields MVLAN This field displays the multicast VLAN ID Name This field displays the descriptive name for this setting Start Address This field displays the starting IP address of
220. ncel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh ES 2108 Series User s Guide Diagnostic This chapter explains the Diagnostic screen 28 1 Diagnostic Click Management gt Diagnostic in the navigation panel to open this screen Use this screen to check system logs ping IP addresses or perform port tests Figure 136 Management gt Diagnostic ONETAN System Log Display Clear IP Ping IP Address Ping Ethernet Port Test Port Port Test The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 89 Management gt Diagnostic LABEL DESCRIPTION System Log Click Display to display a log of events in the multi line text box Click Clear to empty the text box and reset the syslog entry IP Ping Type the IP address of a device that you want to ping in order to test a connection Click Ping to have the Switch ping the IP address in the field to the left Ethernet Port Test Type a port number and click Port Test to perform internal loopback test ES 2108 Series User s Guide 221 Chapter 28 Diagnostic 222 ES 2108 Series User s Guide Syslog This chapter explains the syslog screens 29 1 Syslog Overview The syslog protocol allows devices to send event notification messages across an IP network to syslog servers that collect the event messages A syslog enabled device can generate a syslog message and send it to a syslog ser
221. nd accounting server Mode The Switch supports two modes of recording login events Select e start stop to have the Switch send information to the accounting server when a user begins a session during a user s session if it lasts past the Update Period and when a user ends a session stop only to have the Switch send information to the accounting server only when a user ends a session Method Select whether you want to use RADIUS or TACACS for accounting of specific types of events TACACS is the only method for recording Commands type of event Privilege This field is only configurable for Commands type of event Select the threshold command privilege level for which the Switch should send accounting information The Switch will send accounting information when commands at the level you specify and higher are executed on the Switch ES 2108 Series User s Guide Chapter 20 Authentication amp Accounting Table 51 Advanced Application gt Auth and Acct gt Auth and Acct Setup continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh 20 2 4 Vendor Specific Attribu
222. nfiqure Start VID End VID Apply Enabled Log No None Apply Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 63 Advanced Application gt IP Source Guard gt ARP Inspection gt Configure gt VLAN LABEL DESCRIPTION VLAN Use this section to specify the VLANs you want to manage in the section below Start VID Enter the lowest VLAN ID you want to manage in the section below End VID Enter the highest VLAN ID you want to manage in the section below Apply Click this to display the specified range of VLANs in the section below VID This field displays the VLAN ID of each VLAN in the range specified above If you configure the VLAN the settings are applied to all VLANs Enabled Select Yes to enable ARP inspection on the VLAN Select No to disable ARP inspection on the VLAN ES 2108 Series User s Guide Chapter 21 IP Source Guard Table 63 Advanced Application gt IP Source Guard gt ARP Inspection gt Configure gt VLAN LABEL DESCRIPTION Log Specify when the Switch generates log messages for receiving ARP packets from the VLAN None The Switch does not generate any log messages when it receives an ARP packet from the VLAN Deny The Switch generates log messages when it discards an ARP packet from the VLAN Permit The Switch generates log messages when it forwards an ARP packet from the VLAN All The Switch generates log messages every
223. nformation of any VLANs automatically Select fixed to have the Switch only learn multicast group membership information of the VLAN s that you specify below In either auto or fixed mode the Switch can learn up to 16 VLANs including up to three VLANs you configured in the MVR screen For example if you have configured one multicast VLAN in the MVR screen you can only specify up to 15 VLANs in this screen The Switch drops any IGMP control messages which do not belong to these 16 VLANs Note You must also enable IGMP snooping in the Multicast Setting screen first Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh VLAN Use this section of the screen to add VLANs upon which the Switch is to perform IGMP snooping Name Enter the descriptive name of the VLAN for identification purposes VID Enter the ID of a static VLAN the valid range is between 1 and 4094 Note You cannot configure the same VLAN ID as in the MVR screen Add Click Add to insert the entry in the summary table below and save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or changes to the n
224. ning MAC address learning reduces outgoing broadcast traffic For MAC address learning to occur on a port the port itself must be active activated in the Basic Settings Port Setup screen with address learning enabled Limited Number of Learned MAC Address Use this field to limit the number of dynamic MAC addresses that may be learned on a port For example if you set this field to 5 on port 2 then only the devices with these five learned MAC addresses may access port 2 at any one time A sixth device would have to wait until one of the five learned MAC addresses aged out MAC address aging out time can be set in the Switch Setup screen The valid range is from 0 to 8192 0 means that the limiting of learned addresses is disabled ES 2108 Series User s Guide Chapter 17 Port Security Table 38 Advanced Application gt Port Security continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh 17 3 Port Security Example The following example demonstrates the various settings and results associated with different port security configurations Ports 1 to 5 are configured
225. nk takes you to a screen where you can configure the DHCP settings Management Maintenance This link takes you to screens where you can perform firmware and configuration file maintenance as well as reboot the system Access Control This link takes you to screens where you can change the system login password and configure SNMP and remote management Diagnostic This link takes you to screens where you can view system logs and test port s Syslog This link takes you to screens where you can setup system logs and a system log server Cluster This link takes you to a screen where you can configure clustering management Management and view its status MAC Table This link takes you to a screen where you can view the MAC addresses and types of devices attached to what ports and VLAN IDs ARP Table This link takes you to a screen where you can view the MAC addresses IP address resolution table Configure Clone This link takes you to a screen where you can clone port attributes of a port and transfer them to other port s 4 3 1 Change Your Password After you log in for the first time it is recommended you change the default administrator password Click Management gt Access Control gt Logins to display the next screen ES 2108 Series User s Guide Chapter 4 The Web Configurator Figure 22 Management gt Access Control gt Logins Logins Access Control Old Password
226. no one will step on them or stumble over them Always disconnect all cables from this device before servicing or disassembling Use ONLY an appropriate power adaptor or cord for your device Connect it to the right supply voltage for example 110V AC in North America or 230V AC in Europe Do NOT allow anything to rest on the power adaptor or cord and do NOT place the product where anyone can walk on the power adaptor or cord Do NOT use the device if the power adaptor or cord is damaged as it might cause electrocution If the power adaptor or cord is damaged remove it from the device and the power source Do NOT attempt to repair the power adaptor or cord Contact your local vendor to order a new one Do not use the device outside and make sure all the connections are indoors There is a remote risk of electric shock from lightning The PoE Power over Ethernet devices that supply or receive power and their connected Ethernet cables must all be completely indoors Do NOT obstruct the device ventilation slots as insufficient airflow may harm your device ES 2108 Series User s Guide Safety Warnings This product is recyclable Dispose of it properly ES 2108 Series User s Guide Safety Warnings ES 2108 Series User s Guide Contents Overview Contents Overview ss 29 Getma o EE Yor SURE antn a oar ated ene DEN vn 31 Hardware installation and
227. nsens vei 13 0667 Oslo Norway Poland E mail info pl zyxel com Telephone 48 22 333 8250 Fax 48 22 333 8251 Web www pl zyxel com Regular Mail ZyXEL Communications ul Okrzei 1A 03 715 Warszawa Poland Russia Support http zyxel ru support Sales E mail sales zyxel ru Telephone 7 095 542 89 29 Fax 7 095 542 89 25 Web www zyxel ru Regular Mail ZyXEL Russia Ostrovityanova 37a Str Moscow 117279 Russia Singapore Support E mail support zyxel com sg Sales E mail sales 9 zyxel com sg Telephone 65 6899 6678 Fax 65 6899 8887 Web http www zyxel com sg Regular Mail ZyXEL Singapore Pte Ltd No 2 International Business Park The Strategy 03 28 Singapore 609930 Support E mail support zyxel es Sales E mail sales 9 zyxel es Telephone 4 34 902 195 420 Fax 34 913 005 345 Web www zyxel es Regular Mail ZyXEL Communications Arte 21 5 planta 28033 Madrid Spain ES 2108 Series User s Guide Appendix D Customer Support Sweden Support E mail support zyxel se Sales E mail sales 9 zyxel se Telephone 46 31 744 7700 Fax 46 31 744 7701 Web www zyxel se Regular Mail ZyXEL Communications A S Sj porten 4 41764 Goteborg Sweden Thailand Support E mail support zyxel co th Sales E mail sales zyxel co th Telephone 662 831 5315 Fax 4 662 831 5395 Web http www zyxel co th Regular Mail ZyXEL Thailand Co Ltd 1 1 Moo 2 Ratchaphruk Road Ban
228. ntacansminincncaanenniecadanmseaenmiananty 181 Foute 104 IP Application gt Statie ROUINO ssis tinea acea ra a Ra D cna 182 Figure 105 DiffServ Differentiated Service Field 1 1 ete etit rer tank heh nti amd serena np sae 185 Figure 106 Dupsarv Network Example sestibssstexinberet iv be venen p ERAS FERAT RIS TERI KR T 186 Figure 107 IP Application s DISER acuta icasd Heec nad pat umas Ex dab duco cultura a d GIRL aD dU ad 186 Figure 106 IP Application DiffServ gt DSOP Seting iaucccesceeecesoccetacecire puce cette tet aie e eren e Euer E rnEEcuS 187 Figure TONS TP Appicaion DACP Lusisssscoiidepbb sr eror ard cct Pda beatae 190 Figure 110 IF Application DROP gt GIebal 3 55 eei disi bec t tiddi pere vU pP Vade dtu perl td d duo Paria n dgua es qid dU neq 191 Figure 111 Global DHCP Relay Network Example 12i rere cte Re Eran dran Etude a eaaa 192 Figure 112 DACP Relay Config rtation Example cccccssiecsresissis cena pruvat utto rema R ua kara anina 192 Figure 1149 IE Application DHCP a YLAN uasuccadqesio ps nto pPUI ER ee ER e erus daB EE POE YI Us Ru FATA Ob uM 193 Figure 114 DACP Relay Tor Twa VLANES aussen vreeedas olea V popoli te ab velo RE AR je ERN Rua OA Pagi RE 194 Figure 115 DHCP Relay for Two VLANs Configuration Example sse 194 Figure 116 Management s IIBIntOlTaligB iecore eis enseret trie peek usen ouk REF tte RE REP Ren ERR p tM d BER pF Ete ERR EUaUd 197 Figure 117 Load Factory Default CODO esc oti XP ERR PE n FI
229. nventions The configuration file contains the Switch s settings Once you have customized the Switch s settings they can be saved as a plain text file back to your computer under a filename of your choosing ZyNOS ZyXEL Network Operating System sometimes referred to as the ras file is the system firmware and has a bin filename extension Table 74 Filename Conventions INTERNAL EXTERNA FILE TYPE NAME L NAME DESCRIPTION Configuration File config This is the configuration filename on the Switch Uploading the config file replaces the specified configuration file system including your Switch configurations system related data including the default password the error log and the trace log Firmware ras bin This is the generic name for the ZyNOS firmware on the Switch 26 8 1 1 Example FTP Commands ftp gt put firmware bin ras This is a sample FTP session showing the transfer of the computer file firmware bin to the Switch ftp gt get config config cfg This is a sample FTP session saving the current configuration to a file called config cfg on your computer If your T FTP client does not allow you to have a destination filename different than the source you will need to rename them as the Switch only recognizes config and ras Be sure you keep unaltered copies of both files for later use BS Be sure to upload the correct model firmware as uplo
230. o set the common settings and then make adjustments on a port by port basis Note Changes in this row are copied to all the ports as soon as you make them Active Select this check box to enable broadcast storm control on the port Clear this check box to disable the feature Rate Specify the traffic a port receives in Kilobits per second Kbps If you enter a number between 64 and 1728 the Switch automatically rounds the number down to the nearest multiple of 64 If you enter a number between 1729 and 1999 the rate is fixed at 1792 If you enter a number between 2000 and 103999 the Switch rounds the number down to the nearest multiple of 1000 On a Gigabit Ethernet Mini GBIC slot the Switch rounds a number down to the nearest multiple of 8000 for a number between 104000 and 1000000 Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh ES 2108 Series User s Guide Mirroring This chapter discusses the Mirror setup screens 14 1 Port Mirroring Setup Port mirroring allows you to copy a traffic flow to a monitor port the port you copy the traffic to in order that you can examine the traffic from the mirror po
231. o the Switch can distinguish between authorized and unauthorized ARP packets 2 Enable ARP inspection on the Switch 3 Enable ARP inspection on each VLAN 4 Configure trusted and untrusted ports and specify the maximum number of ARP packets that each port can receive per second ES 2108 Series User s Guide Chapter 21 IP Source Guard 21 2 IP Source Guard Use this screen to look at the current bindings for ARP inspection Bindings are used by ARP inspection to distinguish between authorized and unauthorized packets in the network The Switch learns the bindings from information provided manually by administrators static bindings To open this screen click Advanced Application gt IP Source Guard Figure 91 Advanced Application gt IP Source Guard OES ee Static Binding ARP Inspection Index MAC Address IP Address Lease Type VID Port The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 57 Advanced Application IP Source Guard LABEL DESCRIPTION Index This field displays a sequential number for each binding MAC Address This field displays the source MAC address in the binding IP Address This field displays the IP address assigned to the MAC address in the binding Lease This field displays how many days hours minutes and seconds the binding is valid for example 2d3h4m5s means the binding is still valid for 2 days 3 hours 4 minutes and 5 seconds This field displays infini
232. o the same Ethernet switch and configure the ports for LACP trunking LACP only works on full duplex links All ports in the same trunk group must have the same media type speed duplex mode and flow control settings Configure trunk groups or LACP before you connect the Ethernet switches to avoid causing network topology loops ES 2108 Series User s Guide E Chapter 15 Link Aggregation 15 2 1 Link Aggregation ID LACP aggregation ID consists of the following information Table 32 Link Aggregation ID Local Switch SYSTEM PRIORITY MAC ADDRESS KEY PORT PRIORITY PORT NUMBER 0000 00 00 00 00 00 00 0000 00 0000 Table 33 Link Aggregation ID Peer Switch SYSTEM PRIORITY MAC ADDRESS KEY PORT PRIORITY PORT NUMBER 0000 00 00 00 00 00 00 0000 00 0000 15 3 Link Aggregation Control Protocol Status Click Advanced Application gt Link Aggregation in the navigation panel The Link Aggregation Control Protocol Status screen displays by default See Section 15 1 on page 121 for more information Figure 62 Advanced Application Link Aggregation Status Link Aggregation Status g Link Aggregation Setting Index Enabled Ports Synchronized Ports Aggregator ID Status 1 12 0000 00 00 00 00 00 00 0000 00 0000 0000 00 LACP 00 00 00 00 00 0000 00 0000 2 z The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 34 Advanced Application
233. oad to the cluster member switch cluster manager switch fw 00 a0 c5 d4 88 bf This is the cluster member switch s firmware name as seen in the in the cluster manager switch config 00 a0 c5 d4 88 bf This is the cluster member switch s configuration file name as seen 30 3 Clustering Management Configuration Click Configuration from the Cluster Management screen to display the next screen Use this screen to configure cluster management ES 2108 Series User s Guide Chapter 30 Cluster Management Figure 143 Management gt Cluster Management gt Configuration XSUHcnarRsERECDIGENHercnurrmEr Clustering Manager Status VID Active Iv Name Master FF Clustering Candidate List Password 00 a0 c5 00 00 01 ES 402 4A ES 402 4A m Apply Cancel Index Add Cancel Refresh MacAddr Name Model Remove Remove Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 96 Management gt Cluster Management gt Configuration LABEL DESCRIPTION Clustering Manager Active Select Active to have this Switch become the cluster manager switch A cluster can only have one manager Other directly connected switches that are set to be cluster managers will not be visible in the Clustering Candidates list If a switch that was previously a cluster member is later set to become a cluster manager then its Status is disp
234. oading to the device BS Be sure to upload the correct model firmware as uploading the wrong model firmware may damage your device From the Maintenance screen display the Firmware Upgrade screen as shown next Figure 118 Management gt Maintenance gt Firmware Upgrade Firmware Upgrade Maintenance To upgrade the internal switch firmware browse the location of the binary BIN file and click Upgrade button File Path Browse Rebooting Upgrade Type the path and file name of the firmware file you wish to upload to the Switch in the File Path text box or click Browse to locate it Select the Rebooting check box if you want to reboot the Switch and apply the new firmware immediately Firmware upgrades are only applied after a reboot Click Upgrade to load the new firmware After the firmware upgrade process is complete see the System Info screen to verify your current firmware version number 26 6 Restore a Configuration File Use this screen to restore a previously saved configuration from your computer to the Switch ES 2108 Series User s Guide Chapter 26 Maintenance Figure 119 Management gt Maintenance gt Restore Configuration Restore Configuration d Maintenance To restore the device s configuration from a file browse to the location ofthe configuration file and click Restore button File Path Browse Restore Type the path and file name of the
235. olatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to start configuring the screen again ES 2108 Series User s Guide Static MAC Forwarding Use these screens to configure static MAC address forwarding 9 1 Overview A static MAC address is an address that has been manually entered in the MAC address table Static MAC addresses do not age out When you set up static MAC address rules you are setting static MAC addresses for a port This may reduce the need for broadcasting Static MAC address forwarding together with port security allow only computers in the MAC address table on a port to access the Switch See Chapter 17 on page 131 for more information on port security 9 2 Configuring Static MAC Forwarding A static MAC address is an address that has been manually entered in the MAC address table Static MAC addresses do not age out When you set up static MAC address rules you are setting static MAC addresses for a port This may reduce the need for broadcasting Static MAC address forwarding together with port security allow only computers in the MAC address table on a port to access the Switch See Chapter 17 on page 131 for more information on port security Click Advanced Applications gt Static MAC Forwarding in the navigation panel to display the configuration screen as shown ES 2108 Series User s Guide Chapter 9 Static MAC Forwarding Figure 47 Advanced Application g
236. on example where a subscriber device such as a computer in VLAN 1 receives multicast traffic from the streaming media server S via the Switch Multiple subscriber devices can connect through a port configured as the receiver on the Switch When the subscriber selects a television channel computer A sends an IGMP report to the Switch to join the appropriate multicast group If the IGMP report matches one of the configured MVR multicast group addresses on the Switch an entry is created in the forwarding table on the Switch This maps the subscriber VLAN to the list of forwarding destinations for the specified multicast traffic When the subscriber changes the channel or turns off the computer an IGMP leave message is sent to the Switch to leave the multicast group The Switch sends a query to VLAN 1 on the receiver port in this case a port on the Switch If there is another subscriber device connected to this port in the same subscriber VLAN the receiving port will still be on the list of forwarding destination for the multicast traffic Otherwise the Switch removes the receiver port from the forwarding table Figure 78 MVR Multicast Television Example ES 2108 Series User s Guide Chapter 19 Multicast 19 7 General MVR Configuration Use the MVR screen to create multicast VLANs and select the receiver port s and a source BS port for each multicast VLAN Click Advanced Application gt Multicast gt Multicast Setting
237. on volatile memory when you are done configuring ES 2108 Series User s Guide loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your Chapter 19 Multicast Table 44 Advanced Application gt Multicast gt Multicast Setting gt IGMP Snooping VLAN LABEL DESCRIPTION Cancel Click Cancel to reset the fields to your previous configuration Clear Click this to clear the fields Index This is the number of the IGMP snooping VLAN entry in the table Name This field displays the descriptive name for this VLAN group VID This field displays the ID number of the VLAN group Delete Check the rule s that you want to remove in the Delete column then click the Delete button Cancel Click Cancel to clear the Delete check boxes 19 5 IGMP Filtering Profile An IGMP filtering profile specifies a range of multicast groups that clients connected to the Switch are allowed to join A profile contains a range of multicast IP addresses multicast groups which you want clients to be able to join Profiles are assigned to ports in the Multicast Setting screen Clients connected to those ports are then permitted to join the multicast groups specified in the profile Each port can be assigned a single profile only A profile can be assigned to multiple ports Click Advanced Application gt Multicast gt Multicast Setting gt IGMP Filtering Profile link to display the screen as shown
238. osts on the network IGMP Internet Group Management Protocol is a network layer protocol used to establish membership in a multicast group it is not used to carry user data Refer to RFC 1112 RFC 2236 and RFC 3376 for information on IGMP versions 1 2 and 3 respectively 19 1 1 IP Multicast Addresses In IPv4 a multicast address allows a device to send packets to a specific group of hosts multicast group in a different subnetwork A multicast IP address represents a traffic receiving group not individual receiving devices IP addresses in the Class D range 224 0 0 0 to 239 255 255 255 are used for IP multicasting Certain IP multicast numbers are reserved by IANA for special purposes see the IANA web site for more information 19 1 2 IGMP Filtering With the IGMP filtering feature you can control which IGMP groups a subscriber on a port can join This allows you to control the distribution of multicast services such as content information distribution based on service plans and types of subscription You can set the Switch to filter the multicast group join reports on a per port basis by configuring an IGMP filtering profile and associating the profile to a port 19 1 3 IGMP Snooping The Switch can passively snoop on IGMP packets transferred between IP multicast routers switches and IP multicast hosts to learn the IP multicast group membership It checks IGMP packets passing through it picks out the group registration informa
239. oting a Secure Connection sss 218 Figure 134 Management gt Access Control gt Service Access Control 219 Figure 135 Management gt Access Control gt Remote Management sse 220 Figure 138 Maragement DISOOBINS cassetta ERPOS a adoan ta dan Aa a SE ieee 221 Figure To Managemen SIBI ouscsbettidsderom v rdiabbete iM Di beete uisa beet i qu ore ui did hate rd dob eu D Neige bcp u di ub pedis 224 Figure 138 Management gt Syslog gt Server Setup caaceeceseixeesemes inte erra RR uera A NUR ERR ra R Rer Ikeda 225 Figure 139 Clustering Application Example sssssessssesssesseseee eene entente nnne snnt 228 Figure 140 Management gt Cluster Management Status 228 Figure 141 Cluster Management Cluster Member Web Configurator Screen eseese 229 Figure 142 Example Uploading Firmware to a Cluster Member Switch sssssssssss 230 Figure 143 Management gt Cluster Management gt Configuration sseee 231 Pigura EbErA eNcu ids rca EE D 233 Figure 145 Management MAG Table iussit cacgansceaitdeentnevacsaesvensadeoenesnasdatntnsuieeee eei inki 234 Figure 146 Management ARP Table e 236 Figure 147 Management gt Configure Clone asssessnsesesondakxsedonsckkdannasE ceto Fuseau ada dua d du 237 Pium PIS PODPUE BOKO aa ata ikecun I PM MM M gi qd mae E a agneasadsia reas 242 go UD EEUU EET S ESI 243 Figure 190 I ip Ecrire
240. ough computer X Computer X can read and alter the information passed between them 21 1 1 1 ARP Inspection and MAC Address Filters When the Switch identifies an unauthorized ARP packet it automatically creates a MAC address filter to block traffic from the source MAC address and source VLAN ID of the unauthorized ARP packet You can configure how long the MAC address filter remains in the Switch These MAC address filters are different than regular MAC address filters Chapter 10 on page 99 They are stored only in volatile memory They do not use the same space in memory that regular MAC address filters use They appear only in the ARP Inspection screens and commands not in the MAC Address Filter screens and commands 21 1 1 2 Trusted vs Untrusted Ports Every port is either a trusted port or an untrusted port for ARP inspection The Switch does not discard ARP packets on trusted ports for any reason The Switch discards ARP packets on untrusted ports if the sender s information in the ARP packet does not match any of the current bindings 21 1 1 3 Syslog The Switch can send syslog messages to the specified syslog server Chapter 29 on page 223 when it forwards or discards ARP packets The Switch can consolidate log messages and send log messages in batches to make this mechanism more efficient 21 1 1 4 Configuring ARP Inspection Follow these steps to configure ARP inspection on the Switch 1 Configure static bindings s
241. our changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to reset the fields VLAN This field displays the multicast VLAN ID Active This field displays whether the multicast group is enabled or not Name This field displays the descriptive name for this setting Mode This field displays the MVR mode Source Port This field displays the source port number s Receiver Port This field displays the receiver port number s 802 1p This field displays the IEEE 802 1p priority level assigned to this VLAN Delete To delete a multicast VLAN s select the rule s that you want to remove in the Delete column then click the Delete button Cancel Click Cancel to clear the Delete check boxes 19 8 MVR Group Configuration All source ports and receiver ports belonging to a multicast group can receive multicast data sent to this multicast group ES 2108 Series User s Guide Chapter 19 Multicast Configure MVR IP multicast group address es in the Group Configuration screen Click Group Configuration in the MVR screen A port can belong to more than one multicast VLAN However IP multicast group addresses in different multicast VLANs cannot overlap Figure 80 Advanced Application gt Multicast gt Multicast Setting gt MVR gt Group Configuration C Group Configuration d MVR ga Multicast VLAN ID Name Start Address End Address 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Add Ca
242. ource MAC address in the binding IP Address Enter the IP address assigned to the MAC address in the binding VLAN Enter the source VLAN ID in the binding Port Specify the port s in the binding If this binding has one port select the first radio button and enter the port number in the field to the right If this binding applies to all ports select Any Add Click this to create the specified static binding or to update an existing one Cancel Click this to reset the values above based on the last selected static binding or if not applicable to clear the fields above Clear Click this to clear the fields above Index This field displays a sequential number for each binding MAC Address This field displays the source MAC address in the binding IP Address This field displays the IP address assigned to the MAC address in the binding Lease This field displays how long the binding is valid Type This field displays how the Switch learned the binding static This binding was learned from information provided manually by an administrator VLAN This field displays the source VLAN ID in the binding Port This field displays the port number in the binding If this field is blank the binding applies to all ports Delete Select this and click Delete to remove the specified entry Cancel Click this to clear the Delete check boxes above ES 2108 Series User s Guide Chapter 21 IP Source Guard 21 4 ARP Inspection Status
243. ous configuration 7 4 Introduction to VLANs A VLAN Virtual Local Area Network allows a physical network to be partitioned into multiple logical networks Devices on a logical network belong to one group A device can belong to more than one group With VLAN a device cannot directly talk to or hear from devices that are not in the same group s the traffic must first go through a router ES 2108 Series User s Guide Chapter 7 Basic Setting In MTU Multi Tenant Unit applications VLAN is vital in providing isolation and security among the subscribers When properly configured VLAN prevents one subscriber from accessing the network resources of another on the same LAN thus a user will not see the printers and hard disks of another user in the same building VLAN also increases network performance by limiting broadcasts to a smaller and more manageable logical broadcast domain In traditional switched environments all broadcast packets go to each and every individual port With VLAN all broadcasts are confined to a specific broadcast domain VLAN is unidirectional it only governs outgoing traffic See Chapter 8 on page 87 for information on port based and 802 1Q tagged VLANs 7 5 Switch Setup Screen Click Basic Setting gt Switch Setup in the navigation panel to display the screen as shown The VLAN setup screens change depending on whether you choose 802 1Q or Port Based in the VLAN Type field in this screen
244. owing table describes the labels in this screen Table 43 Advanced Application gt Multicast gt Multicast Setting LABEL DESCRIPTION IGMP Snooping Use this settings to configure IGMP Snooping VLAN Active Select Active to enable IGMP Snooping to forward group multicast traffic only to ports that are members of that group Host Timeout Specify the time from 1 to 16 711 450 in seconds that elapses before the Switch removes an IGMP group membership entry if it does not receive report messages from the port Leave Timeout Enter an IGMP leave timeout value from 1 to 16 711 450 in seconds This defines how many seconds the Switch waits for an IGMP report before removing an IGMP snooping membership entry when an IGMP leave message is received from a host 802 1p Priority Select a priority level 0 7 to which the Switch changes the priority in outgoing IGMP control packets Otherwise select No Change to not replace the priority IGMP Filtering Select Active to enable IGMP filtering to control which IGMP groups a subscriber on a port can join ES 2108 Series User s Guide Chapter 19 Multicast Table 43 Advanced Application gt Multicast gt Multicast Setting continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Unknown Multicast Frame Specify the action to perform when the Switch receives an unknown multicast frame Select Drop to discard the frame s Select Flooding to send the frame s to all por
245. pgrades and information at www zyxel com for global products or at www us zyxel com for North American products ES 2108 Series User s Guide Appendix C Legal Information 270 ES 2108 Series User s Guide Customer Support Please have the following information ready when you contact customer support Required Information 66 9 Product model and serial number Warranty Information Date that you received your device Brief description of the problem and the steps you took to solve it is the prefix number you dial to make an international telephone call Corporate Headquarters Worldwide Support E mail support zyxel com tw Sales E mail sales zyxel com tw Telephone 886 3 578 3942 Fax 886 3 578 2439 Web www zyxel com www europe zyxel com FTP ftp zyxel com ftp europe zyxel com Regular Mail ZyXEL Communications Corp 6 Innovation Road II Science Park Hsinchu 300 Taiwan Costa Rica Support E mail soporte zyxel co cr Sales E mail sales zyxel co cr Telephone 506 2017878 Fax 506 2015098 Web www zyxel co cr FTP ftp zyxel co cr Regular Mail ZyXEL Costa Rica Plaza Roble Escaz Etapa El Patio Tercer Piso San Jos Costa Rica Czech Republic E mail info cz zyxel com Telephone 420 241 091 350 Fax 420 241 091 359 Web www zyxel cz ES 2108 Series User s Guide 271 Appendix D Customer Support Regular Mail ZyXEL Communications Czech s r o
246. ponding MAC address below MAC Address This is the MAC address of the device with corresponding IP address above Type This shows whether the MAC address is dynamic learned by the Switch or static manually entered in the Static MAC Forwarding screen 236 ES 2108 Series User s Guide Configure Clone This chapter shows you how you can copy the settings of one port onto other ports 33 1 Configure Clone Settings Cloning allows you to copy the basic and advanced settings from a source port to a destination port or ports Click Management gt Configure Clone to open the following screen Figure 147 Management gt Configure Clone O Configure Clone Source Destination Port Port Features Active Name Basic Setting Speeds Duplex Flow Control Intrusion Lock VLAN1q VLAN1q Member Bandwidth Control Port Security Broadcast Storm Control Mirroring Advanced Application Port Authentication IGMP Filtering I Spanning Tree Protocol Port based VLAN Ethernet OAM Loop Guard ARP Inspection Apply Cancel ES 2108 Series User s Guide 237 Chapter 33 Configure Clone The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 99 Management gt Configure Clone LABEL DESCRIPTION Source Enter the source port under the Source label This port s attributes are copied Destination Enter the destination port
247. pter 20 Authentication amp Accounting Table 50 Advanced Application gt Auth and Acct gt TACACS Server Setup continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Shared Secret Specify a password up to 32 alphanumeric characters as the key to be shared between the external TACACS server and the Switch This key is not sent over the network This key must be the same on the external TACACS server and the Switch Delete Check this box if you want to remove an existing TACACS server entry from the Switch This entry is deleted when you click Apply Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh Accounting Use this section to configure your TACACS accounting settings Server Timeout Specify the amount of time in seconds that the Switch waits for an accounting request response from the TACACS server Index This is a read only number representing a TACACS accounting server entry IP Address Enter the IP address of an external TACACS accounting server in dotted decimal notation TCP Port The default port of a TACACS accounting server is 49 You need not change this value unless your network administrator instructs you to do so S
248. r down to the nearest multiple of 64 If you enter a number between 1729 and 1999 the rate is fixed at 1792 If you enter a number between 2000 and 103999 the Switch rounds the number down to the nearest multiple of 1000 On a Gigabit Ethernet Mini GBIC slot the Switch rounds a number down to the nearest multiple of 8000 for a number between 104000 and 1000000 Active Make sure to select this check box to activate egress limits on a port Egress Rate Specify the maximum bandwidth allowed in Kilobits per second Kbps for the out going traffic flow on a port If you enter a number between 64 and 1728 the Switch automatically rounds the number down to the nearest multiple of 64 If you enter a number between 1729 and 1999 the rate is fixed at 1792 If you enter a number between 2000 and 103999 the Switch rounds the number down to the nearest multiple of 1000 On a Gigabit Ethernet Mini GBIC slot the Switch rounds a number down to the nearest multiple of 8000 for a number between 104000 and 1000000 Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to reset the fields to your previous configuration ES 2108 Series User s Guide Broadcast Storm Control This
249. rd Use a password that s not easy to guess and that consists of different types of characters such as numbers and letters Write down the password and put it in a safe place Back up the configuration and make sure you know how to restore it Restoring an earlier working configuration may be useful if the device becomes unstable or even crashes If you forget your password you will have to reset the Switch to its factory default settings If you backed up an earlier configuration file you would not have to totally re configure the Switch You could simply restore your last configuration ES 2108 Series User s Guide 35 Chapter 1 Getting to Know Your Switch ES 2108 Series User s Guide Hardware Installation and Connection This chapter shows you how to install and connect the Switch 2 1 Freestanding Installation 1 Make sure the Switch is clean and dry 2 Setthe Switch on a smooth level surface strong enough to support the weight of the Switch and the connected cables Make sure there is a power outlet nearby 3 Make sure there is enough clearance around the Switch to allow air circulation and the attachment of cables and the power cord 4 Remove the adhesive backing from the rubber feet 5 Attach the rubber feet to each corner on the bottom of the Switch These rubber feet help protect the Switch from shock or vibration and ensure space between devices when stacking Figure 6 Attaching Rubber Feet
250. red speed and duplex mode when making a connection thus requiring you to make sure that the settings of the peer Ethernet port are the same in order to connect Use this screen to configure Switch port settings Click Basic Setting gt Port Setup in the navigation panel to enter the port configuration screen The ES 2108PWR screen is different from the other models covered in this UG The screen from ES 2108 G model is shown for comparison Figure 37 Basic Setting gt Port Setup ES 2108PWR COLETE Port Active Name Type Speed Duplex Flow Control 802 1p Priority PD mg auto rl r o a 1 wf oom ao 0 e 2 wf tow ato a joz e 3 m wt fao vr E o K 4 wf moo o e 5 v oM Auto l OF m amp ve tonoom fato rj mi foz A 7 wf 4onoom to vl r o wv s wf tonoom aw rl z 0 e 9 m oto Auto x D 0v Apply Cancel ES 2108 Series User s Guide Chapter 7 Basic Setting Figure 38 Basic Setting gt Port Setup ES 2108 G Port oO Oo 7 CD 4 CO WH OLDEST Active THT Name Type Speed Duplex Flow Control 802 1p Priority uo Mo r 10 1 00M Auta 10 1 00M Auto 10 1 00M Auto 10 100M auo A 10 100M Auto 10 100M Auta 10 1 00M Auto 10 1 00M Auto 1onoonooom fato 4 0 0 0 0 0 0 na a0 ad Apply Cancel The following table describes the labels in
251. reful not to lock yourself and others out of the Switch 4 6 Resetting the Switch If you lock yourself and others from the Switch or forget the Switch password you will need to reload the factory default configuration file or reset the Switch back to the factory defaults 4 6 1 Reload the Factory default Configuration File Uploading the factory default configuration file replaces the current configuration file with the factory default configuration file This means that you will lose all previous configurations and the speed of the console port will be reset to the default of 9600bps with 8 data bit no parity one stop bit and flow control set to none The password will also be reset to 1234 and the IP address to 192 168 1 1 To upload the factory default configuration file do the following 1 2 Connect to the console port using a computer with terminal emulation software See Section 3 1 1 on page 43 for details Disconnect and reconnect the Switch s power to begin a session When you reconnect the Switch s power you will see the initial screen When you see the message Press any key to enter Debug Mode within 3 seconds press any key to enter debug mode Type atic after the 1 Wait for the Starti Enter Debug Mode message ng XMODEM upload message before activating XMODEM upload on your terminal After the factory default configuration file upload type atgo to restart the
252. ric Attribute Registration Protocol allows network switches to register and de register attribute values with other GARP participants within a bridged LAN GARP is a protocol that provides a generic mechanism for protocols that serve a more specific application for example GVRP 8 2 1 1 GARP Timers Switches join VLANs by making a declaration A declaration is made by issuing a Join message using GARP Declarations are withdrawn by issuing a Leave message A Leave All message terminates all registrations GARP timers set declaration timeout values 8 2 2 GVRP GVRP GARP VLAN Registration Protocol is a registration protocol that defines a way for switches to register necessary VLAN members on ports across the network Enable this function to permit VLANs groups beyond the local Switch Please refer to the following table for common GARP terminology Table 14 IEEE 802 1q Terminology VLAN PARAMETER TERM DESCRIPTION VLAN Type Permanent VLAN This is a static VLAN created manually Dynamic VLAN This is a VLAN configured by a GVRP registration deregistration process VLAN Administrative Registration Fixed Fixed registration ports are permanent VLAN members Control Registration Ports with registration forbidden are forbidden to join the Forbidden specified VLAN Normal Registration Ports dynamically join a VLAN using GVRP VLAN Tag Control Tagged Ports belonging to the specified VLAN tag all outgoing fra
253. rity See Section 17 3 on page 133 for supported configurations and an example 17 2 Port Security Setup Click Advanced Application gt Port Security in the navigation panel to display the screen as shown ES 2108 Series User s Guide Chapter 17 Port Security Figure 70 Advanced Application gt Port Security Orin DiMA 4 020 5 NN OLAS Port Active Address Learning Limited Number of Learned MAC Address 4 e Hu Ha HuHu HaHa He Active E 2 eae KR A K 0 990 4 Apply Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 38 Advanced Application gt Port Security LABEL DESCRIPTION Active Select this check box to enable the port security feature on the Switch Port This field displays a port number Settings in this row apply to all ports Use this row only if you want to make some settings the same for all ports Use this row first to set the common settings and then make adjustments on a port by port basis Note Changes in this row are copied to all the ports as soon as you make them Active Select this check box to enable the port security feature on this port The Switch forwards packets whose MAC address es is in the MAC address table on this port Packets with no matching MAC address es are dropped Clear this check box to disable the port security feature The Switch forwards all packets on this port Address Lear
254. rk For each LAN segment a designated bridge is selected This bridge has the lowest cost to the root among the bridges connected to the LAN 11 1 2 How STP Works After a bridge determines the lowest cost spanning tree with STP it enables the root port and the ports that are the designated ports for connected LANs and disables all other ports that participate in STP Network packets are therefore only forwarded between enabled ports eliminating any possible network loops STP aware switches exchange Bridge Protocol Data Units BPDUs periodically When the bridged LAN topology changes a new spanning tree is constructed Once a stable network topology has been established all bridges listen for Hello BPDUs Bridge Protocol Data Units transmitted from the root bridge If a bridge does not get a Hello BPDU after a predefined interval Max Age the bridge assumes that the link to the root bridge is down This bridge then initiates negotiations with other bridges to reconfigure the network to re establish a valid network topology ES 2108 Series User s Guide Chapter 11 Spanning Tree Protocol 11 1 3 STP Port States STP assigns five port states to eliminate packet looping A bridge port is not allowed to go directly from blocking state to forwarding state so as to eliminate transient loops Table 23 STP Port States PORT STATE DESCRIPTION Disabled STP is disabled default Blocking Only configuration and mana
255. rnet Explorer click Tools Internet Options and then the Security tab 2 Click the Custom Level button 3 Scroll down to Microsoft VM 4 Under Java permissions make sure that a safety level is selected 5 Click OK to close the window Figure 154 Security Settings Java Security Settings 2 xi Settings Q Disable 9 Enable EX Font download Disable 9 Enable i Q Prompt 3 Microsoft vM 5 Java permissions o Custom Reset to Medium Reset E te custom settings 246 ES 2108 Series User s Guide Chapter 34 Troubleshooting 34 2 1 3 1 JAVA Sun 1 From Internet Explorer click Tools Internet Options and then the Advanced tab 2 Make sure that Use Java 2 for applet under Java Sun is selected 3 Click OK to close the window Figure 155 Java Sun General Security Privacy Content Connections Programs Advanced Settings O Use inline AutoComplete O Use Passive FTP for firewall and DSL modem compatibility Use smooth scrolling HTTP 1 1 settings Use HTTP 1 1 O Use HTTP 1 1 through proxy connections gt Java Sun Use Java 2 v1 4 1 07 for applet requires restart 3 Microsoft VM Ld a console enabled requires restart BPH enabled ompiler for virtual machine enabled requires restart Multimedia O Always show Internet Explorer 5 0 or later Radio toolbar O Don t display online media content in the media bar Enable Automatic Ima
256. rrupted servers Are you sure you want to continue connecting yes no yes Ceo Co c o Do you want to change the host key on disk yes no yes Agent forwarding re enabled X11 forwarding re enabled Host key saved to C Documents and Settings Administrator Application Data SSH hostkeys key 22 192 168 1 1 pub host key for 192 168 1 1 accepted by Administrator Thu May 12 2005 09 52 21 admin s password Authentication successful Copyright c 1994 2006 ZyXEL Communications Corp ras 27 8 Introduction to HTTPS HTTPS Hyper Text Transfer Protocol over Secure Socket Layer or HTTP over SSL is a web protocol that encrypts and decrypts web pages Secure Socket Layer SSL is an application level protocol that enables secure transactions of data by ensuring confidentiality an unauthorized party cannot read the transferred data authentication one party can identify the other party and data integrity you know if data has been changed It relies upon certificates public keys and private keys HTTPS on the Switch is used so that you may securely access the Switch using the web configurator When a computer requests an HTTPS secure connection the Switch sends its certificate to the computer The user decides if he wants to trust the certificate If the user decides to trust the certificate the certificate is used in building the HTTPS connection Please refer to the
257. rt without interference Click Advanced Application gt Mirroring in the navigation panel to display the Mirroring screen Use this screen to select a monitor port and specify the traffic flow to be copied to the monitor port Figure 61 Advanced Application gt Mirroring OMT Active O Monitor Port Port 1 i C Al C Destination MAC Source MAC an EN EN RE ERR RUE all Destination MAC C Source MAC arii H B B HB Port Mirrored Direction r ress 1 Ingress 2 Ingress 3 r ingress Ii 4 r ingress fl 5 r ingress il 6 Ingress gt r ingress il 2 r ingrese i o r ingrese fil Apply Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 31 Advanced Application gt Mirroring LABEL DESCRIPTION Active Clear this check box to deactivate port mirroring on the Switch Monitor The monitor port is the port you copy the traffic to in order to examine it in more detail Port without interfering with the traffic flow on the original port s Select this port from this drop down list box ES 2108 Series User s Guide Chapter 14 Mirroring Table 31 Advanced Application gt Mirroring continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Ingress You can specify to copy all incoming traffic or traffic to from a specified MAC address Select All to copy all incoming traffic from the mirrored port s Select Destination MA
258. s 25 3 1 DHCP Relay Agent Information The Switch can add information about the source of client DHCP requests that it relays to a DHCP server by adding Relay Agent Information This helps provide authentication about the source of the requests The DHCP server can then provide an IP address based on this information Please refer to RFC 3046 for more details The DHCP Relay Agent Information feature adds an Agent Information field to the Option 82 field The Option 82 field is in the DHCP headers of client DHCP request frames that the Switch relays to a DHCP server Relay Agent Information can include the System Name of the Switch if you select this option You can change the System Name in Basic Settings General Setup The following describes the DHCP relay information that the Switch sends to the DHCP server Table 70 Relay Agent Information FIELD LABELS DESCRIPTION Slot ID 1 byte This value is always 0 for stand alone switches Port ID 1 byte This is the port that the DHCP client is connected to ES 2108 Series User s Guide Chapter 25 DHCP Table 70 Relay Agent Information FIELD LABELS DESCRIPTION VLAN ID 2 bytes This is the VLAN that the port belongs to Information up to 64 bytes This optional read only field is set according to system name set in Basic Settings General Setup 25 3 2 Configuring DHCP Global Relay Configure global DHCP relay in the DHCP Rel
259. s Filter Filter traffic based on the source and or destination MAC address and VLAN group ID DHCP Client DHCP Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol RFC 2131 and RFC 2132 allows individual computers to obtain TCP IP configuration at start up from a server You can configure the Switch as a DHCP client to obtain TCP IP information such as the IP address and subnet mask from a DHCP server If you disable the DHCP service you must manually enter the TCP IP information DHCP Relay Use this feature to have the relay DHCP requests to DHCP servers on your network IGMP Snooping The Switch supports IGMP snooping enabling group multicast traffic to be only forwarded to ports that are members of that group thus allowing you to significantly reduce multicast traffic passing through your Switch ES 2108 Series User s Guide 254 Appendix A Product Specifications Table 104 Firmware Specifications FEATURE DESCRIPTION Differentiated Services DiffServ With DiffServ the Switch marks packets so that they receive specific per hop treatment at DiffServ compliant network devices along the route based on the application types and traffic flow Queuing Queuing is used to help solve performance degradation when there is network congestion Three scheduling services are supported Strict Priority Queuing SPQ Weighted Round Robin WRR and Weighted Fair Queuing WFQ This allows the Swi
260. s in this row apply to all ports Use this row only if you want to make some settings the same for all ports Use this row first to set the common settings and then make adjustments on a port by port basis Note Changes in this row are copied to all the ports as soon as you make them LACP Timeout is the time interval between the individual port exchanges of LACP packets in Timeout order to check that the peer port in the trunk group is still up If a port does not respond after three tries then it is deemed to be down and is removed from the trunk Set a short timeout one second for busy trunked links to ensure that disabled ports are removed from the trunk group as soon as possible Select either 1 second or 30 seconds Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh 15 6 Static Trunking Example This example shows you how to create a static port trunk group for ports 2 5 1 Make your physical connections make sure that the ports that you want to belong to the trunk group are connected to the same destination The following figure shows ports 2 5 on switch A connected to switch B Figure 65 Trunking Example Physical Conn
261. se FTP to upload firmware to a cluster member switch through the cluster manager switch as shown in the following example Figure 142 Example Uploading Firmware to a Cluster Member Switch CENS fep 192 169 1 1 Connected to 192 168 1 1 220 FTP version 1 0 ready at Thu Jan 1 00 47 52 1970 User 192 168 1 1 none admin 331 Enter PASS command Password 230 Logged in ftp gt 1s 200 Port command okay 150 Opening data connection for LIST W W w 1 owner group 3209434 Jul 01 12 00 ras rw rw rw 1 owner group 393216 Jul 01 12 00 config W W w 1 owner group 0 Jul 01 12 00 fw 00 a0 c5 d4 88 bf rw rw rw 1 owner group 0 Jul 01 12 00 config 00 a0 c5 d4 88 bf 226 File sent OK ftp 463 bytes received in 0 00Seconds 463000 00Kbytes sec ftp bin 00 Type I OK ftp put 350dul bin fw 00 a0 c5 d4 88 bf 00 Port command okay 150 Opening data connection for STOR fw 00 a0 c5 d4 88 bf 226 File received OK tp 262144 bytes sent in 0 63Seconds 415 44Kbytes sec tp N N Hh Hh The following table explains some of the FTP parameters Table 95 FTP Upload to Cluster Member Example FTP PARAMETER DESCRIPTION User Enter admin Password The web configurator password default is 1234 ls Enter this command to list the name of cluster member switch s firmware and configuration file 350dul bin This is the name of the firmware file you want to upl
262. ses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Clear Click Clear to clear the fields to the factory defaults Profile Name This field displays the descriptive name of the profile Start Address This field displays the start of the multicast address range End Address This field displays the end of the multicast address range Delete To delete the profile s and all the accompanying rules select the profile s that you want to remove in the Delete Profile column then click the Delete button To delete a rule s from a profile select the rule s that you want to remove in the Delete Rule column then click the Delete button Cancel Click Cancel to clear the Delete Profile Delete Rule check boxes 19 6 MVR Overview Multicast VLAN Registration MVR is designed for applications such as Media on Demand MoD that use multicast traffic across an Ethernet ring based service provider network MVR allows one single multicast VLAN to be shared among different subscriber VLANs on the network While isolated in different subscriber VLANs connected devices can subscribe to and unsubscribe from the multicast stream in the multicast VLAN This improves bandwidth utilization with reduced multicast traffic in the subscriber VLANs and simplifies multicast group management You must enable IGMP snooping to use MVR However
263. siendizopcnm ena s i berrtai eto un dirot tesis nena a dens n Dau a ERA 42 Figure 14 Transceiver Installation EXaIDIG cccsscsscccncsseteseccnnmmencdeconsmacscdemsmmnscantatunncsedunnmunsevesamussaccemmniceens 45 Foure 15 insialed anco vol suseni aiaia EE dad ps HU UE eR ud Cu anu ae EE d 45 Figure 16 Opening the Transceiver s Latch Example sssssssssseeseeeeee enne nnns 45 Figure 17 Transceiver Removal Example Ere n ERE RED E ERREDIS EE C Rp REA id i DRM RR Va eR GR 45 ligure 18 Rear Panel AC Model oromini a Eod a iaa 46 Figures 19 Rear Panel DO p 46 Figure 20 Web Coniguiator LOON co uera ett PRO bcc aab ga EN ARARA Ea 52 Figure 21 Web Configurator Home Screen Status sesenta 52 Figure 22 Management Access Control gt LOGINS sirismisasdissiiicsn ainan iet pme situe rra ERR M Lek rU aGE 57 Figure 23 Resetting the Switch Via the Console Port ES 2108 G see 59 Figure 24 Web Gontg rstar Logot OOIBBIT t Schr Pete aae b Pre Xd i Er EEN EEI ARK 59 Figure 25 Initial Setup Network Example VLAN ensem hn tn ntn na Ra Eae ier enn 61 Figure 26 Initial Setup Network Example Port VID 2 seacescus ettari cs nebat nta tutu trad 63 Figure 27 Initial Setup Example Management IP Address ssssssseseeeeeeneennnen 64 Moure 20 DIS JE S IUBPNIEO anioi eaa a d E a re rer reer Hat EN En ra DU bcc Terre 65 ac iubere idco cR 66 Figure 30 Status Por Details ES 2 TUBPVIEU
264. ss Control Start Address End Address Telnet FTP HTTP ICMP SNMP SSH HTTPS 000 A 3 oo wv Mw E FW NW NM FW 2000 Boo o o o o n o om 000 booo o o o o oO O O ooo oo o on o n n npn n Apply Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 88 Management gt Access Control gt Remote Management End Address LABEL DESCRIPTION Entry This is the client set index number A client set is a group of one or more trusted computers from which an administrator may use a service to manage the Switch Active Select this check box to activate this secured client set Clear the check box if you wish to temporarily disable the set without deleting it Start Address Configure the IP address range of trusted computers from which you can manage this Switch The Switch checks if the client IP address of a computer requesting a service or protocol matches the range set here The Switch immediately disconnects the session if it does not match Telnet FTP Select services that may be used for managing the Switch from the specified trusted HTTP ICMP computers SNMP SSH HTTPS Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Ca
265. ssieseeenn nnne 241 Table 101 Troubleshooting Accessing tie SWHEN 1s rare beri er nte aeta sani GR Ron TERR RR Rada 241 Table 102 Troubleshooting ihe Password 2ddssaspotidien teptuisatetUrdiedunt Prrdutegt eeprdi eate prd ae aR C Pre disant PEU Qoa id 247 Ee MUENSILI CL Seecctoior Wt 249 No xps eren rem 251 BEI cues uedps ese owns Met LET 253 Table 106 Standards SHOPS sirrinin or ia P Dea Edi a See Mitvan Ld Presa ants dise 254 Table 107 IP Address Network Number and Host ID Example sse 258 Hs Ac o uci c onn anne aiie ES 259 Tablo 109 Maximum Mast NUDO sisxcnseasserunpitiiasidpudcduresccrsk prre gar pax Sev Dad ERR EFE p EUR a tue preda 259 Table 110 Alternative Subnet Mask Notation sssseeesesssseseseeseesesse nennen nnn tn nannten eraa 259 TS WT NSN ect 261 TAS TEE SURES aaassesctesidutiutu peut seal apse atasiana adit ved eatintes tonua vem a Fo OR raa 262 BE cxcvcnpn uc e em 262 jEis aaee E NT A 262 THEE CIO BQ UN E A E E EAE ombres S T E tls Cerita A ath 262 Table 116 24 bit Network Number Subnet Planning ssssssssssssesesesrnessnssssnssssessressrenssrnssetnnesnnsennnennnnns 263 Table 117 16 bit Network Number Subnet Planning sssssssssssosssnssrnsssrssssrssssessrsssrssssrsssssnnsssnsssnnsesnnns 263 ES 2108 Series User s Guide List of Tables ES 2108 Series User s Guide PART Introduction Getting to Know Your Switch 31 Hardware Installa
266. sss 153 Figure 88 Advanced Application gt Auth and Acct gt TACACS Server Setup 155 Figure 89 Advanced Application gt Auth and Acct gt Auth and Acct Setup sssssssssss 157 Figure Bo Example Mansnsthesmitidle JAUSBK aisiais aAA 165 Figure 91 Advanced Application gt IP Source Guard sessssssssesssseseeen eene 167 Figure 92 Advanced Application gt IP Source Guard gt Static Binding ssssssssss 168 Figure 93 Advanced Application gt IP Source Guard gt ARP Inspection Status susssse 169 Figure 94 Advanced Application gt IP Source Guard gt ARP Inspection gt Log Status 170 Figure 95 Advanced Application gt IP Source Guard gt ARP Inspection gt Configure 171 Figure 96 Advanced Application gt IP Source Guard gt ARP Inspection gt Configure gt Port 172 Figure 97 Advanced Application gt IP Source Guard gt ARP Inspection gt Configure gt VLAN 173 gps Loot Guard tS a E N 175 Poue oo ST TE LI IU TE UU UU ETT 176 Figure 100 Loop Guard Probe PaeKOL sue reete teni a Sede aaa ied teva 176 Figure TOX Loop Guard Nelwork LODS anas ue d pras as reel in plein A 176 Figure 102 Advanced Application Loop Guard 1 esie tritt rint artt stretta ane Rss Y nq iaai 177 Figure 103 Static Routing OYIGA ccisciicnccdncresctacsissbanniranniices stmmimaeredaa
267. sts to different DHCP servers for clients in different VLAN 25 2 DHCP Status Click IP Application gt DHCP in the navigation panel to open the following screen ES 2108 Series User s Guide Chapter 25 DHCP Figure 109 IP Application gt DHCP DHCP Status Global VLAN Relay Status Relay Mode VLAN 1 The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 69 IP Application gt DHCP LABEL DESCRIPTION Relay Mode This field displays e None if the Switch is not configured as a DHCP relay agent Global if the Switch is configured as a DHCP relay agent only VLAN followed by a VLAN ID if it is configured as a relay agent for specific VLAN s 25 3 DHCP Relay Configure DHCP relay on the Switch if the DHCP clients and the DHCP server are not in the same broadcast domain During the initial IP address leasing the Switch helps to relay network information such as the IP address and subnet mask between a DHCP client and a DHCP server Once the DHCP client obtains an IP address and can connect to the network network information renewal is done between the DHCP client and the DHCP server without the help of the Switch The Switch can be configured as a global DHCP relay This means that the Switch forwards all DHCP requests from all domains to the same DHCP server You can also configure the Switch to relay DHCP information based on the VLAN membership of the DHCP client
268. submenu links Table 4 Navigation Panel Sub links Overview BASIC SETTING ADVANCED APPLICATION IP APPLICATION MANAGEMENT Basic Setting Advanced Application Management System Info General Setup Switch Setup IP Setup Port Setup Basic Setting Advanced Application IP Application Management VLAN Static MAC Forwarding Filtering Spanning Tree Protocol Bandwidth Control Broadcast Storm Control Mirroring Link Aggregation Port Authentication Port Security Queuing Method Multicast Auth and Acct IP Source Guard Loop Guard Basic Setting Advanced Application IP Application Management Static Routing DiffServ DHCP Management Maintenance Access Control Diagnostic Syslog Cluster Management MAC Table ARP Table Configure Clone ES 2108 Series User s Guide Chapter 4 The Web Configurator The following table lists the various web configurator screens within the sub links Table 5 Web Configurator Screen Sub links Details ADVANCED BASIC SETTING APPLICATION IP APPLICATION MANAGEMENT System Info VLAN Static Routing Maintenance General Setup Switch Setup IP Setup Port Setup VLAN Status VLAN Port Setting Static VLAN Static MAC Forwarding Filtering Spanning Tree Protocol Status Configuration RSTP MSTP Bandwidth Control Broadcast Storm Control Mirroring Link Aggregation Status Link Aggregation
269. t Static MAC Forwarding siatie MAC Forwarding 9 Active Name MAC Address VID Port Index Active peus Add Cancel Clear Name MAC Address VID Port Delete Delete Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 20 Advanced Application Static MAC Forwarding LABEL DESCRIPTION Active Select this check box to activate your rule You may temporarily deactivate a rule without deleting it by clearing this check box Name Enter a descriptive name for identification purposes for this static MAC address forwarding rule MAC Address Enter the MAC address in valid MAC address format that is six hexadecimal character pairs Note Static MAC addresses do not age out VID Enter the VLAN identification number Port Type the port number where the MAC address entered in the previous field will be automatically forwarded Add After you set the fields above click Add to insert a new rule Clicking Add saves your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to reset the fields Clear Click Clear to begin configuring this screen afresh Index Click an index number to modify a static MAC address r
270. t 132 maximum number per port 132 static 131 MAC address learning 97 MAC filter and ARP inspection 166 MAC table 233 how it works 233 view 234 maintenance 197 Management Information Base MIB 204 management port 96 managing the device good habits 35 using FTP See FTP using SNMP See SNMP using Telnet See command interface using the command interface See command interface using the web configurator See web configurator man in the middle attacks 165 max age 111 hops 111 MIB 204 supported MIBs 205 mini GBIC ports 44 connection speed 44 connector type 44 transceiver installation 44 transceiver removal 45 mini GBIC slots 44 mini GBIC port 43 mirror port 119 mounting brackets 38 MSA MultiSource Agreement 44 MST Instance See MSTI 105 MST region 104 MSTI 105 MST ID 105 MSTI Multiple Spanning Tree Instance 103 MSTP 101 103 bridge ID 113 114 configuration 109 configuration digest 114 forwarding delay 111 Hello Time 113 hello time 111 Max Age 113 max age 111 max hops 111 MST region 104 network example 103 path cost 112 port priority 112 revision level 111 MSTP Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol 101 MTU Multi Tenant Unit 76 multicast 137 multicast group 142 multicast settings 139 multicast VLAN 146 multicasting 802 1 priority 139 addresses 137 setup 138 Multiple Spanning Tree Instance See MSTI 103 Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol See MSTP 101 Multiple STP see MSTP 103 MVR 143 configuration
271. t install an SSH client program on a client computer Windows or Linux operating system that is used to connect to the Switch over SSH ES 2108 Series User s Guide Chapter 27 Access Control 27 7 2 SSH Login Example You can use an SSH client program to access the Switch The following figure shows an example using a text based SSH client program Refer to the documentation that comes with your SSH program for information on using it Figure 128 SSH Login Example C gt ssh2 admin 192 168 1 1 CE CECE CECI CIE CECI CI CECI CI CI CECI CIT CI CECI CI CI CECI CI CE CECI CI CE CECI CI CE CECI CI CECI CI CI CECI CI CI CECI CI CI CECI CIT CI CECI CIC WARNING HOST IDENTIFICATION HAS CHANGED CRECERECEREREREEEEEEEECERECEREECEEEECEEEEEEEEEEEEREEEREEEEEE IT IS POSSIBLE THAT SOMEONE IS DOING SOMETHING NASTY Someone could be eavesdropping on you right now man in the middle attack It is also possible that the host key has just been changed Please contact your system administrator Add correct host key to C Documents and Settings Administrator Application Data SSH hostkeys key_22_192 168 1 1 pub to get rid of this message Received server key s fingerprint xigil gidot homug duzab tocyh pamyb ronep tisaf hebip gokeb goxix You can get a public key s fingerprint by running ssh keygen F publickey pub on the keyfile Agent forwarding is disabled to avoid attacks by corrupted Servers X11 forwarding is disabled to avoid attacks by co
272. t purposes 7 2 System Information BS In the navigation panel click Basic Setting gt System Info to display the screen as shown You can check the firmware version number and monitor the Switch temperature fan speeds and voltage on the PWR model in this screen The ES 2108PWR screen is different from the other models covered in this UG The screen from ES 2108 G model is shown for comparison ES 2108 Series User s Guide Chapter 7 Basic Setting Figure 32 Basic Setting gt System Info ES 2108PWR t System info ZyNOS FAW Version PoE Status Total Power W 200 0 Consuming Power W 0 0 Remaining Power VW 200 0 ES 2108PWR V3 80 ABS 0 b2 05 28 2007 00 13 49 00 00 01 System Name Ethernet Address Hardware Monitor Temperature Unit C ZyNOS FAW Version Temperature C Current MAX MIN Threshold Status CPU 46 0 49 0 44 0 85 0 Normal MAC 42 0 42 0 41 0 75 0 Normal LOCAL 42 0 42 0 41 0 75 0 Normal FAN Speed RPM Current MAX MIN Threshold Status FAN1 7531 7563 7397 3500 Normal Voltage V Current MAX MIN Threshold Status 1 25VIN 1 243 1 243 1 243 i B596 Normal 1 8VIN 1 834 1 834 1 820 i B596 Normal 3 3VIN 3 311 3 311 3 253 i B96 Normal 2 5VIN 2 576 2 576 2 576 i B96 Normal Figure 33 Basic Setting gt System Info ES 2108 G System Into J System Name ES 2108 G V3 80 ABL O b1 05 09 2007 Ethernet Address 00 13 49 00 00 01 The following table describ
273. tance Priority Configure the priority for each port here Priority decides which port should be disabled when more than one port forms a loop in the Switch Ports with a higher priority numeric value are disabled first The allowed range is between 0 and 255 and the default value is 128 Path Cost Path cost is the cost of transmitting a frame on to a LAN through that port It is recommended to assign this value according to the speed of the bridge The slower the media the higher the cost see Table 22 on page 102 for more information Add Click Add to save this MST instance to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses this change if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh Instance This field displays the ID of an MST instance VLAN This field displays the VID or VID ranges to which the MST instance is mapped Active Port This field display the ports configured to participate in the MST instance Delete Check the rule s that you want to remove in the Delete column and then click the Delete button Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh 11 7 Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol Status Click Advanced Application gt Spanning Tree Protocol in the navigation panel to display the status screen as
274. tch to maintain separate queues for packets from each individual source or flow and prevent a source from monopolizing the bandwidth Port Mirroring Port mirroring allows you to copy traffic going from one or all ports to another or all ports in order that you can examine the traffic from the mirror port the port you copy the traffic to without interference Static Route Static routes tell the Switch how to forward IP traffic when you configure the TCP IP parameters manually Multicast VLAN Registration MVR Multicast VLAN Registration MVR is designed for applications such as Media on Demand MoD using multicast traffic across a network MVR allows one single multicast VLAN to be shared among different subscriber VLANs on the network This improves bandwidth utilization by reducing multicast traffic in the subscriber VLANs and simplifies multicast group management STP Spanning Tree Protocol RSTP Rapid STP R STP detects and breaks network loops and provides backup links between switches bridges or routers It allows a Switch to interact with other R STP compliant switches in your network to ensure that only one path exists between any two stations on the network MSTP Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol IEEE 802 1s is backward compatible with STP RSTP In MSTP switching devices are grouped into a region which appears as a single network to the outside world Wit
275. te RFC 2865 standard specifies a method for sending vendor specific information between a RADIUS server and a network access device for example the Switch A company can create Vendor Specific Attributes VSAs to expand the functionality of a RADIUS server The Switch supports VSAs that allow you to perform the following actions based on user authentication Limit bandwidth on incoming or outgoing traffic for the port the user connects to Assign account privilege levels See the CLI Reference Guide for more information on account privilege levels for the authenticated user The VSAs are composed of the following Vendor ID An identification number assigned to the company by the IANA Internet Assigned Numbers Authority ZyXEL s vendor ID is 890 Vendor Type A vendor specified attribute identifying the setting you want to modify Vendor data A value you want to assign to the setting LES Refer to the documentation that comes with your RADIUS server on how to configure VSAs for users authenticating via the RADIUS server The following table describes the VSAs supported on the Switch Table 52 Supported VSAs FUNCTION ATTRIBUTE Ingress Bandwidth Vendor Id 890 Assignment Vendor Type 1 Vendor data ingress rate Kbps in decimal format ES 2108 Series User s Guide Chapter 20 Authentication amp Accounting Table 52 Supported VSAs FUNCTION ATTRIBUTE Egress Bandwidth Vendor Id
276. th MSTP VLANs 1 and 2 are mapped to different spanning trees in the network Thus traffic from the two VLANs travel on different paths The following figure shows the network example using MSTP Figure 50 MSTP Network Example 11 1 4 2 MST Region An MST region is a logical grouping of multiple network devices that appears as a single device to the rest of the network Each MSTP enabled device can only belong to one MST region When BPDUs enter an MST region external path cost of paths outside this region is increased by one Internal path cost of paths within this region is increased by one when BPDUs traverse the region Devices that belong to the same MST region are configured to have the same MSTP configuration identification settings These include the following parameters Name of the MST region Revision level as the unique number for the MST region ES 2108 Series User s Guide Chapter 11 Spanning Tree Protocol VLAN to MST Instance mapping 11 1 4 3 MST Instance An MST Instance MSTI is a spanning tree instance VLANs can be configured to run on a specific MSTI Each created MSTI is identified by a unique number known as an MST ID known internally to a region Thus an MSTI does not span across MST regions The following figure shows an example where there are two MST regions Regions 1 and 2 have 2 spanning tree instances Figure 51 MSTIs in Different Regions Physical Connection Region 2
277. th the SFP Transceiver MultiSource Agreement MSA See the SFF committee s INF 80741 specification Rev 1 0 for details There is one Gigabit Ethernet and mini GBIC slot each The mini GBIC slot has priority over the Gigabit port This means that if the mini GBIC slot and the corresponding Gigabit port are connected at the same time the Gigabit port will be disabled You can change transceivers while the Switch is operating You can use different transceivers to connect to Ethernet switches with different types of fiber optic connectors Type SFP connection interface Connection speed 1 Gigabit per second Gbps gt To avoid possible eye injury do not look into an operating fiber optic module s connectors 3 1 4 1 Transceiver Installation Use the following steps to install a mini GBIC transceiver SFP module 1 Insert the transceiver into the slot with the exposed section of PCB board facing down ES 2108 Series User s Guide Chapter 3 Hardware Overview Figure 14 Transceiver Installation Example ac acl 2 Press the transceiver firmly until it clicks into place 3 The Switch automatically detects the installed transceiver Check the LEDs to verify that it is functioning properly Figure 15 Installed Transceiver 3 1 4 2 Transceiver Removal Use the following steps to remove a mini GBIC transceiver SFP module 1 Open the transceiver s latch latch styles vary Figure 16 Opening the Transceiver
278. thentication and Accounting Setup sssssssssssseeeeeee neret 156 20424 Vendor Specht FIDES irato Serbis da dida bus d uen ks clair ad DOR ED dra 159 20 3 Supported RADIUS ATIIDUGS sciinta ai ense a ccpit garde 160 20 3 1 Attributes Used Tor Authentication iius reete preter ras emi hen rm hia ca oaa 161 20 32 AitniDules Used Tor een inier 161 Chapter 21 iu 11 01 X M M O 165 21 IP cource Cua DUBII raices RH e aan Rao real Rab n ur san vd Rx 165 21 1 1 ARP Ihapecuohn QUEIVIQ uisccuicuamerssaccbicic onda mu iina aai KG AUD ideal Fa d Es 165 caeca Able 167 ES 2108 Series User s Guide 15 Table of Contents ELS IP Sourps Guard Slate BIC sinirika Fa aia peo aging aq Ra d 167 214 MP Meet dL tsar sonidaki EN E cdm dtt Dada bae tl ddan 169 21 4 1 ARP Ingpecdon Log SAUS iussu ene Ere croi etant er ch im ees 169 ELS ARP Inspector Gon OUE 1 25 5 Podio arb Edo oce S Re HDD RU Ono P ML a b rtp RUE 170 2150 ABE Inspecnon PO Omi saresmi BERE er eb pRed IRR obe TRUE prO dae pR US 172 2152 ARP Inspeccion VLAN OCONIIUKG cexccsasspne qun etc R E ucc n bn aar e araa 173 Chapter 22 FU A Y MM M 175 22 MIR sede FEE p I NR T 175 22 2 Loop Guald SEUD m 177 Pat IV Laer 2 2 eee ra 179 Chapter 23 idi 181 ey Wome Routing COWIE e TEE 181 2
279. this screen Table 92 Management gt Syslog gt Server Setup LABEL DESCRIPTION Active Select this check box to have the device send logs to this syslog server Clear the check box if you want to create a syslog server entry but not have the device send logs to it you can edit the entry later Server Address Enter the IP address of the syslog server Log Level Select the severity level s of the logs that you want the device to send to this syslog server The lower the number the more critical the logs are Add Click Add to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to reset the fields Clear Click Clear to return the fields to the factory defaults Index This is the index number of a syslog server entry Click this number to edit the entry Active This field displays Yes if the device is to send logs to the syslog server No displays if the device is not to send logs to the syslog server IP Address This field displays the IP address of the syslog server Log Level This field displays the severity level of the logs that the device is to send to this syslog server Delete Select an entry s Delete check box and click Delete to remove the entry Cancel Click
280. time then appears in the Current Time field after you click Apply ES 2108 Series User s Guide Chapter 7 Basic Setting Table 10 Basic Setting gt General Setup continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Current Date This field displays the date you open this menu New Date yyyy mm dd Enter the new date in year month and day format The new date then appears in the Current Date field after you click Apply Time Zone Select the time difference between UTC Universal Time Coordinated formerly known as GMT Greenwich Mean Time and your time zone from the drop down list box Daylight Saving Time Daylight saving is a period from late spring to early fall wnen many countries set their clocks ahead of normal local time by one hour to give more daytime light in the evening Select this option if you use Daylight Saving Time Start Date Configure the day and time when Daylight Saving Time starts if you selected Daylight Saving Time The time is displayed in the 24 hour format Here are a couple of examples Daylight Saving Time starts in most parts of the United States on the second Sunday of March Each time zone in the United States starts using Daylight Saving Time at 2 A M local time So in the United States you would select Second Sunday March and 2 00 Daylight Saving Time starts in the European Union on the last Sunday of March All of the time zones in the European Union start using Da
281. ting Computer and Router IP Addresses Example More than one device can not use the same IP address In the following example the computer and the router s LAN port both use 192 168 1 1 as the IP address The computer cannot access the Internet This problem can be solved by assigning a different IP address to the computer or the router s LAN port Figure 163 Conflicting Computer and Router IP Addresses Example 9pm um um um Hm Um Um EZ a g 192 168 1 1 LAN WAN i a n 192 168 1 1 Internet a m ES 2108 Series User s Guide Legal Information Copyright Copyright 2007 by ZyXEL Communications Corporation The contents of this publication may not be reproduced in any part or as a whole transcribed stored in a retrieval system translated into any language or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic mechanical magnetic optical chemical photocopying manual or otherwise without the prior written permission of ZyXEL Communications Corporation Published by ZyXEL Communications Corporation All rights reserved Disclaimer ZyXEL does not assume any liability arising out of the application or use of any products or software described herein Neither does it convey any license under its patent rights nor the patent rights of others ZyXEL further reserves the right to make changes in any products described herein without notice This publication is subject to change
282. tion and configures multicasting accordingly IGMP snooping allows the Switch to learn multicast groups without you having to manually configure them ES 2108 Series User s Guide Chapter 19 Multicast The Switch forwards multicast traffic destined for multicast groups that it has learned from IGMP snooping or that you have manually configured to ports that are members of that group IGMP snooping generates no additional network traffic allowing you to significantly reduce multicast traffic passing through your Switch 19 1 4 IGMP Snooping and VLANs The Switch can perform IGMP snooping on VLANs You can configure the Switch to automatically learn multicast group membership of any VLANs The Switch then performs IGMP snooping on the first VLANs that send IGMP packets see Table 105 on page 253 for how many VLANs the Switch can perform IGMP snooping on This is referred to as auto mode Alternatively you can specify the VLANs that IGMP snooping should be performed on This is referred to as fixed mode In fixed mode the Switch does not learn multicast group membership of any VLANs other than those explicitly added as an IGMP snooping VLAN 19 2 Multicast Status Click Advanced Applications gt Multicast to display the screen as shown This screen shows the multicast group information See Section 19 1 on page 137 for more information on multicasting Figure 73 Advanced Application gt Multicast Status Multicast Stat
283. tion and Connection 37 Hardware Overview 41 Getting to Know Your Switch This chapter introduces the main features and applications of the Switch 1 1 Introduction This User s Guide covers the following models ES 2108 ES 2108 F ES 2108 LC ES 2108 G and ES 2108PWR The following table lists features that are specific to the individual models The other features discussed in this chapter are common to all of the models covered in this User s Guide BS See Appendix A on page 249 for detailed features and standards support Table 1 Model Specific Features MODEL FEATURE ES 2108 ES 2108 F ES 2108 LC ES 2108 G ES 2108PWR Dual personality interface a 1000BASE T copper RJ 45 port and a Small Form Factor Pluggable SFP slot also called a mini GBIC slot with one port active at a time X X Fast Ethernet SFP Slot Mini GBIC Slot 100 Base FX Fiber Optic Port IEEE 802 3af Power over Ethernet compliant Ethernet Ports Fan less design X X X X With its built in web configurator managing and configuring the Switch is easy In addition the Switch can also be managed via Telnet SSH Secure SHell any terminal emulator program on the console port or third party SNMP management 1 1 1 Backbone Application In this application the Switch is an ideal solution for small networks where rapid growth can be expected in the near future
284. to Port 1 Forward all packets and learn all MAC addresses Port 2 Forward all packets and learn all MAC addresses e Port 3 Drop all packets from unknown MAC addresses and do not learn MAC addresses Port 4 Drop all packets from unknown MAC addresses and do not learn MAC addresses Port 5 Drop all packets from unknown MAC addresses but forward packets from up to 100 learned MAC addresses Figure 71 Port Security Example Port Security g Active IV Port Active Address Learning Limited Number of Learned MAC Address C Vv 1 O Iv 2 Vv Vv 3 Vv C 4 Iv C 5 Vv Iv B C Vv 7 C Vv 8 1 iv Apply Cancel ES 2108 Series User s Guide Chapter 17 Port Security The following table is a summary of configuration and results of this example Table 39 Port Security Example SETTINGS PORT ACTIVATE ACTIVATE LIMIT NO OF RESULT PORT ADDRESS LEARNED MAC SECURITY LEARNING ADDRESSES 1 X 0 disables limits Forward all packets learn all MAC addresses 2 X X 0 disables limits Forward all packets learn all MAC addresses 3 X 0 disables limits Drop all packets from unknown MAC addresses do not learn MAC addresses 4 X 100 Drop all packets from unknown MAC addresses do not learn MAC addresses 5 X X 100 Drop packets from unknown MAC addresses learn up to 100 MAC addresses ES 2108 Series User s Guide Queuing Method This
285. to M 121 15 2 CANIS e e e A E T E E cba te RD ads idR mad d dd 122 15 3 Link Aggregation Gontrol Protocol Stats cscesegeci avsccsiatediganaeeniaregeababvldscenazetsasebeasvisconetess 122 TOA LINK AgoregaloH SEI anusnusasdopdn eden o ae pa e teed apri Ord ra ada 123 15 5 Link Aggregation Control Protocol ausus eiae t aa ctr cus aina Fog Cube Edu rab sess 124 190 Staue TRIG ERA IS mec 125 Chapter 16 Port AUTON TIGA AY O EE 0 2 TOO O 127 161 sid dod ccushEec ir FM 127 161 1 NEE 902 1 Sui t PD o o 127 16 2 Port Authentication CONDOLIESBON v s ee pria aes DR e nera boc ocn d a RR EA 128 10 23 Activate IEEE BUS BCU uuasxsgiienineri dar iuri ad one ER cu das ara da ka Oedipus 128 Chapter 17 Porn Seuri c A 2 2e 0 A 131 UEM Fon Ser CIV 1 s e 131 T1212 POR Ny GR cad redacto cipio da iade acoso bur cs n a padece aai ae a a 131 17 8 Pom Sum CI t em o adie SEE 133 Chapter 18 Blu HE A 1 O O Oa a m 135 ES 2108 Series User s Guide Table of Contents Duke ID Method SOV C EN NRI T T 135 TET doti POS CIUBDIDE COP sasaaina niaaa edtded as Uo pi ape OS Fu 135 18 1 2 Weighted Round Robin Scheduling WRR iere r etn treten hes 135 T1858 Comigo Gueuing Metligd 2e peti aod Rol dace Rel Eb RR Madsen ctore a Ris 136 Chapter 19 i
286. trator user name Only the administrator has read write access Old Password Type the existing system password 1234 is the default password when shipped New Password Enter your new system password Retype to confirm Retype your new system password for confirmation Edit Logins You may configure passwords for up to four users These people have read only access User Name Set a user name up to 30 characters long Password Enter your new system password Retype to confirm Retype your new system password for confirmation 212 ES 2108 Series User s Guide Chapter 27 Access Control Table 86 Management gt Access Control gt Logins continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh 27 5 SSH Overview Unlike Telnet or FTP which transmit data in clear text SSH Secure Shell is a secure communication protocol that combines authentication and data encryption to provide secure encrypted communication between two hosts over an unsecured network Figure 126 SSH Communication Example didi N M He nd MN Lu SSH Server SSH Client 2
287. ts Port This field displays the port number Settings in this row apply to all ports Use this row only if you want to make some settings the same for all ports Use this row first to set the common settings and then make adjustments on a port by port basis Note Changes in this row are copied to all the ports as soon as you make them Immed Leave Select this option to set the Switch to remove this port from the multicast tree when an IGMP version 2 leave message is received on this port Select this option if there is only one host connected to this port Group Limited Select this option to limit the number of multicast groups this port is allowed to join Max Group Num Enter the number of multicast groups this port is allowed to join Once a port is registered in the specified number of multicast groups any new IGMP join report frame s is dropped on this port IGMP Filtering Profile Select the name of the IGMP filtering profile to use for this port Otherwise select Default to prohibit the port from joining any multicast group IGMP Querier Mode The Switch treats an IGMP query port as being connected to an IGMP multicast router or server The Switch forwards IGMP join or leave packets to an IGMP query port Select Auto to have the Switch use the port as an IGMP query port if the port receives IGMP query packets Select Fixed to have the Switch always use the port as an IGMP qu
288. tworks that need high bandwidth In the following example use trunking to connect these two networks Switching to higher speed LANs such as ATM Asynchronous Transmission Mode is not feasible for most people due to the expense of replacing all existing Ethernet cables and adapter cards restructuring your network and complex maintenance The Switch can provide the same bandwidth as ATM at much lower cost while still being able to use existing adapters and switches Moreover the current LAN structure can be retained as all ports can freely communicate with each other Figure 3 High Performance Switched Application 1 1 4 IEEE 802 1Q VLAN Application Examples This section shows a workgroup and a shared server example using 802 1Q tagged VLANs A VLAN Virtual Local Area Network allows a physical network to be partitioned into multiple logical networks Stations on a logical network belong to one group A station can belong to more than one group With VLAN a station cannot directly talk to or hear from stations that are not in the same group s unless such traffic first goes through a router For more information on VLANs refer to Chapter 8 on page 87 1 1 4 1 Tag based VLAN Example Ports in the same VLAN group share the same frame broadcast domain thus increase network performance through reduced broadcast traffic VLAN groups can be modified at any time by adding moving or changing ports without any re cabling ES 2108 Series
289. ty if the binding is always valid for example a static binding Type This field displays how the Switch learned the binding static This binding was learned from information provided manually by an administrator VID This field displays the source VLAN ID in the binding Port This field displays the port number in the binding If this field is blank the binding applies to all ports 21 3 IP Source Guard Static Binding Use this screen to manage static bindings for ARP inspection Static bindings are uniquely identified by the MAC address and VLAN ID Each MAC address and VLAN ID can only be in one static binding If you try to create a static binding with the same MAC address and VLAN ID as an existing static binding the new static binding replaces the original one To open this screen click Advanced Application IP Source Guard Static Binding ES 2108 Series User s Guide Chapter 21 IP Source Guard Figure 92 Advanced Application gt IP Source Guard gt Static Binding t_ IP Source Guard Static Binding IPSG MAC Address IP Address VLAN Port st Any Add Cancel Clear Index MAC Address IP Address Lease Type VLAN Port Delete Delete Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 58 Advanced Application IP Source Guard Static Binding LABEL DESCRIPTION MAC Address Enter the s
290. u how to configure static routes 23 1 Static Routing Overview The Switch uses IP for communication with management computers for example using HTTP telnet SSH or SNMP Use IP static routes to have the Switch respond to remote management stations that are not reachable through the default gateway The Switch can also use static routes to send data to a server or device that is not reachable through the default gateway for example when sending SNMP traps or using ping to test IP connectivity This figure shows a Telnet session coming in from network N1 The Switch sends reply traffic to default gateway R1 which routes it back to the manager s computer The Switch needs a static route to tell it to use router R2 to send traffic to an SNMP trap server on network N2 Figure 103 Static Routing Overview m 23 2 Configuring Static Routing Click IP Application gt Static Routing in the navigation panel to display the screen as shown ES 2108 Series User s Guide Chapter 23 Static Route Figure 104 IP Application gt Static Routing E Static Routing Active C 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Name Destination IP Address IP Subnet Mask Gateway IP Address Metric Add Cancel Clear Index Active Name Destination Address Subnet Mask Gateway Address Metric Delete 1 Yes Example TEAC Tal 255 255 0 0 192 158 1 2 2 3 Delete Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen
291. ue IP address Devices with duplicate IP addresses on the same network will not be able to access the Internet or other resources The devices may also be unreachable through the network Conflicting Computer IP Addresses Example More than one device can not use the same IP address In the following example computer A has a static or fixed IP address that is the same as the IP address that a DHCP server assigns to computer B which is a DHCP client Neither can access the Internet This problem can be solved by assigning a different static IP address to computer A or setting computer A to obtain an IP address automatically Figure 161 Conflicting Computer IP Addresses Example E AN SQ I 192 168 1 33 Gees Dw rmer p L a E 192 168 1 33 uammmmmmm ees Conflicting Router IP Addresses Example Since a router connects different networks it must have interfaces using different network numbers For example if a router is set between a LAN and the Internet WAN the router s LAN and WAN addresses must be on different subnets In the following example the LAN and WAN are on the same subnet The LAN computers cannot access the Internet because the router cannot route between networks Figure 162 Conflicting Computer IP Addresses Example WAN 0M UB Um Um EM NM Um Nm um gt Se SBS SS SSS SS ES 2108 Series User s Guide Appendix B IP Addresses and Subnetting Conflic
292. ule for a port Active This field displays whether this static MAC address forwarding rule is active Yes or not No You may temporarily deactivate a rule without deleting it Name This field displays the descriptive name for identification purposes for this static MAC address forwarding rule MAC Address This field displays the MAC address that will be forwarded and the VLAN identification number to which the MAC address belongs VID This field displays the VLAN identification number Port This field displays the port where the MAC address shown in the next field will be forwarded Delete Click Delete to remove the selected entry from the summary table Cancel Click Cancel to clear the Delete check boxes ES 2108 Series User s Guide Filtering This chapter discusses MAC address port filtering 10 1 Configure a Filtering Rule Filtering means sifting traffic going through the Switch based on the source MAC addresses and VLAN group ID Click Advanced Application gt Filtering in the navigation panel to display the screen as shown next Figure 48 Advanced Application gt Filtering r Filtering Active C Name MAC VID Add Cancel Clear Index Active Name MAC Address VID Delete Delete Cancel The following table describes the related labels in this screen Table 21 Advanced Application Flltering LABEL DESCRIPTION Active Make sure to sel
293. ulticast Status ecicasceesiiesee ene amenkene aiaa 138 Figure 74 Advanced Application gt Multicast gt Multicast Setting ssssssssss 139 Figure 75 Advanced Application gt Multicast gt Multicast Setting gt IGMP Snooping VLAN 144 Figure 76 Advanced Application gt Multicast gt Multicast Setting IGMP Filtering Profile 142 xc Xd ly RNONOK EAN Jette cer 143 Figure 73 MYR Mulicast Television EXENTIDIEE aicsuiussscoptbissintsordiacbebuie dao DU DRESS SED edid ebgb dio dan pU QNID UR RN 144 Figure 79 Advanced Application gt Multicast gt Multicast Setting gt MVR sse 145 Figure 80 Advanced Application gt Multicast gt Multicast Setting gt MVR gt Group Configuration 147 Figure S1 i Caine EAU GIS sissano renoneer E aaen a aati 148 22 ES 2108 Series User s Guide List of Figures Figure 82 MVR Gonigaretion EXSEDIS 2st bipa Epoca id bI Fila cp latc a e ORE ELSE dau dan pot 149 Figure o3 MVR Group Contiguration EXSImple assesses edodank cin da aera rcd rated oss kan d acr nup gai 149 Figure 84 MVR Group Configuration EXSITIDIB isisisi sirina tanna anaa eaa E aAa 150 Poue O5 AA IBI anaE N prid dn M naa tn eae ada 181 Figure 86 Advanced Application gt Auth and ACCE sssceeeiienne tetra tinte da a nnE Re tra X Nn REC EE ananasa 152 Figure 87 Advanced Application gt Auth and Acct gt RADIUS Server Setup
294. umber Of Member 2 MacAddr Name Model Status 00 30 c5 01 23 45 ES 4024A ES 4024A Online 00 a0 5 5f a2 b9 ES 3024 ES 3024 Online ES 2108 Series User s Guide Chapter 30 Cluster Management The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 94 Management gt Cluster Management Status LABEL DESCRIPTION Status This field displays the role of this Switch within the cluster Manager Member you see this if you access this screen in the cluster member switch directly and not via the cluster manager None neither a manager nor a member of a cluster Manager This field displays the cluster manager switch s hardware MAC address The Number of This field displays the number of switches that make up this cluster The following Member fields describe the cluster member switches Index You can manage cluster member switches via the cluster manager switch Each number in the Index column is a hyperlink leading to the cluster member switch s web configurator see Figure 141 on page 229 MacAddr This is the cluster member switch s hardware MAC address Name This is the cluster member switch s System Name Model This field displays the model name Status This field displays Online the cluster member switch is accessible Error for example the cluster member switch password was changed or the switch was set as the manager and so left the member list etc Offline the switch
295. unauthorized ARP packets in your network A binding contains these key attributes MAC address VLAN ID P address Port number When the Switch receives an ARP packet it looks up the appropriate MAC address VLAN ID IP address and port number in the binding table If there is a binding the Switch forwards the packet If there is not a binding the Switch discards the packet The Switch builds from information provided manually by administrators static bindings IP source guard consists of the following features e Static bindings Use this to create static bindings in the binding table ARP inspection Use this to filter unauthorized ARP packets on the network 21 1 1 ARP Inspection Overview Use ARP inspection to filter unauthorized ARP packets on the network This can prevent many kinds of man in the middle attacks such as the one in the following example Figure 90 Example Man in the middle Attack S r1 ES 2108 Series User s Guide Chapter 21 IP Source Guard In this example computer B tries to establish a connection with computer A Computer X is in the same broadcast domain as computer A and intercepts the ARP request for computer A Then computer X does the following things It pretends to be computer A and responds to computer B It pretends to be computer B and sends a message to computer A As a result all the communication between computer A and computer B passes thr
296. uring Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh Clear Click this to clear the fields above VID This field displays the ID number of the VLAN group to which this DHCP settings apply Type This field displays the DHCP mode Relay ES 2108 Series User s Guide Chapter 25 DHCP Table 72 P Application gt DHCP gt VLAN continued LABEL DESCRIPTION DHCP Status For DHCP relay configuration this field displays the first remote DHCP server IP address Delete Select the configuration entries you want to remove and click Delete to remove them Cancel Click Cancel to clear the Delete check boxes 25 4 1 Example DHCP Relay for Two VLANs The following example displays two VLANs VIDs 1 and 2 for a campus network Two DHCP servers are installed to serve each VLAN The system is set up to forward DHCP requests from the dormitory rooms VLAN 1 to the DHCP server with an IP address of 192 168 1 100 Requests from the academic buildings VLAN 2 are sent to the other DHCP server with an IP address of 172 23 10 100 Figure 114 DHCP Relay for Two VLANs E 100 atm e PELLEM E DHCP 172 23 10 100 It For the example network configure the VLAN Setting screen as shown mt Figure 115 DHCP Relay for Two VLANs Configuration Example ORINE TED Status VID b Remote DHCP Server 1 22310100 Remote DHCP Server 2 foooo Remote DHCP Server 3 noon
297. us Multicast Setting index VID Port Multicast Group 1 1 2 224 0 1 22 The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 42 Advanced Application gt Multicast Status LABEL DESCRIPTION Index This is the index number of the entry VID This field displays the multicast VLAN ID Port This field displays the port number that belongs to the multicast group Multicast Group This field displays IP multicast group addresses 19 3 Multicast Setting Click Advanced Application gt Multicast gt Multicast Setting link to display the screen as shown See Section 19 1 on page 137 for more information on multicasting ES 2108 Series User s Guide Chapter 19 Multicast Figure 74 Advanced Application gt Multicast gt Multicast Setting OME SEnC Multicast Status IGMP Snooping VLAN IGMP Filtering Profile MVR Active O Host Timeout e IGMP Snooping oae Timani p 802 1p Priority No Change v IGMP Filtering Active m Unknown Multicast Frame Flooding C Drop Port Immed Leave Group Limited Max Group Num IGMP Filtering Profile IGMP Querier Mode r z o Default Auto 1 fo Default Auto 2 C O fo Defautt j Auto 3 O E fo Default Auto z p Defaut Auto 5 D O boo Default Auto 6 O O fo Defautt Auto 7 E O fo Default Auto 8 C C fo Defautt Auto 9 O m fo Default Auto v Apply Cancel The foll
298. use This field shows the number of 802 3x Pause packets received TX Collision The following fields display information on collisions while transmitting Single This is a count of successfully transmitted packets for which transmission is inhibited by exactly one collision Multiple This is a count of successfully transmitted packets for which transmission was inhibited by more than one collision Excessive This is a count of packets for which transmission failed due to excessive collisions Excessive collision is defined as the number of maximum collisions before the retransmission count is reset Late This is the number of times a late collision is detected that is after 512 bits of the packets have already been transmitted Error Packet ES 2108 Series User s Guide Chapter 6 System Status and Port Statistics Table 8 Status Port Details continued LABEL DESCRIPTION RX CRC This field shows the number of packets received with CRC Cyclic Redundant Check error s Runt This field shows the number of packets received that were too short shorter than 64 octets including the ones with CRC errors Distribution 64 This field shows the number of packets including bad packets received that were 64 octets in length 65 127 This field shows the number of packets including bad packets received that were between 65 and 127 octets in length 128 255 This field
299. used in full duplex mode to send a pause signal to the sending port causing it to temporarily stop sending signals when the receiving port memory buffers fill Back Pressure flow control is typically used in half duplex mode to send a collision signal to the sending port mimicking a state of packet collision causing the sending port to temporarily stop sending signals and resend later Select Flow Control to enable it 802 1P Priority This priority value is added to incoming frames without a 802 1p priority queue tag See Priority Queue Assignment in Table 11 on page 77 for more information PD PWR model Only This field is only available on the PWR model but not available for the Gigabit or mini GBIC slots A powered device PD is a device such as an access point or a switch that supports PoE Power over Ethernet so that it can receive power from another device through a 10 100Mbps Ethernet port Select the check box to allow a powered device connected to the port to receive power from the Switch Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to reset the fields to your previous configuration ES 2108 Series User s Guide Chapter 7 Basic Setting
300. uster member switch s model name Remove Select this checkbox and then click the Remove button to remove a cluster member switch from the cluster Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this part of the screen afresh ES 2108 Series User s Guide MAC Table This chapter introduces the MAC Table screen 31 1 MAC Table Overview The MAC Table screen a MAC table is also known as a filtering database shows how frames are forwarded or filtered across the Switch s ports It shows what device MAC address belonging to what VLAN group if any is forwarded to which port s and whether the MAC address is dynamic learned by the Switch or static manually entered in the Static MAC Forwarding screen The Switch uses the MAC table to determine how to forward frames See the following figure 1 The Switch examines a received frame and learns the port on which this source MAC address came 2 The Switch checks to see if the frame s destination MAC address matches a source MAC address already learned in the MAC table Ifthe Switch has already learned the port for this MAC address then it forwards the frame to that port If the Switch has not already learned the port for this MAC address then the frame is flooded to all ports Too much port flooding leads to network congestion Ifthe Switch has already learned the port for this MAC address but the destination port is the same as the port it came in on then it filters the frame
301. vanced Application gt Auth and Acct in the navigation panel to display the screen as shown Figure 86 Advanced Application gt Auth and Acct OENUDSDESGDLEUDECITnUDDEENNO RADIUS Server Setup Click Here TACACS Server Setup Click Here Auth and Acct Setup Click Here 20 2 1 RADIUS Server Setup Use this screen to configure your RADIUS server settings See Section 20 1 2 on page 152 for more information on RADIUS servers and Section 20 3 on page 160 for RADIUS attributes utilized by the authentication and accounting features on the Switch Click on the RADIUS Server Setup link in the Authentication and Accounting screen to view the screen as shown 152 ES 2108 Series User s Guide Chapter 20 Authentication amp Accounting Figure 87 Advanced Application gt Auth and Acct gt RADIUS Server Setup C RADIUS Server Setup Auth and Acct Authentication Server Mode index priority Timeout 30 seconds Index IP Address UDP Port Shared Secret Delete 1 0 0 0 0 1812 O 2 0 0 0 0 1612 O Apply Cancel Accounting Server Timeout 30 seconds Index IP Address UDP Port Shared Secret Delete 1 0 0 0 0 1813 C 2 0 0 0 0 1813 O Apply Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 49 Advanced Application gt Auth and Acct gt RADIUS Server Setup LABEL DESCRIPTION Authentication Use this section to configure your RADIUS authentication
302. ve button to make the changes take effect If you want to access the Switch web configurator again you may need to change the IP address of your computer to be in the same subnet as that of the default Switch IP address 192 168 1 1 26 3 Save Configuration Save Configuration allows you to save your settings to the Switch s non volatile memory BS Whenever you make configuration changes to the Switch and hit Apply or Add the Switch saves the settings to its run time memory These settings are lost when you restart the Switch In the Maintenance screen click the Config 1 button next to Save Configuration to save your settings to the Switch s non volatile memory These settings are not lost when you restart the Switch Alternatively you can click the Save button on the top right corner of the web configurator to save your settings to the Switch s non volatile memory ES 2108 Series User s Guide Chapter 26 Maintenance 26 4 Reboot System Reboot System allows you to restart the Switch without physically turning the power off Follow the steps below to reboot the Switch 1 Inthe Maintenance screen click the Config 1 button next to Reboot System to restart the Switch 2 Click OK again and then wait for the Switch to restart This does not affect the Switch s configuration 26 5 Firmware Upgrade Make sure you have downloaded and unzipped the correct model firmware and version to your computer before upl
303. veineraaninenes detente eet 55 ile EE EAEE E teenage reeset PUDOR E A meron ot A T A nt AR P T A A TA 66 Tablo S hus Part Dells ausser SERERE DER p EPEQ GR BER HU DERE EF X OBERE EE oBEKE PET QU EBENE RPU OR BEK BEL E BER PH E BEAR EE UA 68 Table 9 Basic Seting Sysbe THE sinin Ferca Ph borea aacra koc a ord eat b aad Hel 72 Table 10 Bagic Sening OSEE Liisouuacimodascb add aAa dado bark Dess aab d 74 Table TI Basie Selling SWC SU girsi saae aii RR pcnc t uibem Vs tin res ea Rer P Gio E eate cie ewes 77 Table t2 Basie Semis IP SEDE ausit denen pta a d peat RE een gs boa ih pa P ts 79 Table 13 Basie cenno Po SS sauseexdiiittebidpPpED RI I un Nieto ek BERE ecl a DE bxdva daa ob age Rede nob Ue na 82 Table 14 3E CONES nuns MM 88 Table 15 Advanced Application gt VLAN VLAN Status nenne 90 Table 16 Advanced Application gt VLAN gt VLAN Details esseeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeneenen neret 91 Table 17 Advanced Application gt VLAN gt Static VLAN isse rni arb ce ai e ri rci 92 Table 18 Advanced Application gt VLAN gt VLAN Port Setting sess 93 Table 19 Advanced Application gt VLAN Port Based VLAN Setup sssssesssseeenneennernne 96 Table 20 Advanced Application gt Static MAC Forwarding 98 Table 21 Advanced Aplications Fieri icoicuiiossbeeet dos iRpFUFIA S DREPPrUI QEFbEEEU irn ia US DRE REF UL DURO E ETRER 99 Tale 22 ETP PRU SS arise eepuiensenenNM HU dIbu un En Rid EESs inde D MM ANI ENIM UI
304. ver Syslog is defined in RFC 3164 The RFC defines the packet format content and system log related information of syslog messages Each syslog message has a facility and severity level The syslog facility identifies a file in the syslog server Refer to the documentation of your syslog program for details The following table describes the syslog severity levels Table 90 Syslog Severity Levels CODE SEVERITY Emergency The system is unusable Alert Action must be taken immediately Critical The system condition is critical Error There is an error condition on the system Warning There is a warning condition on the system Notice There is a normal but significant condition on the system Informational The syslog contains an informational message N OO oO BR WO N Debug The message is intended for debug level purposes 29 2 Syslog Setup Click Management gt Syslog in the navigation panel to display this screen The syslog feature sends logs to an external syslog server Use this screen to configure the device s system logging settings ES 2108 Series User s Guide 223 Chapter 29 Syslog Figure 137 Management gt Syslog Syslog Setup Syslog Server Setup Syslog Active Logging type Active Facility System O local use 0 Interface E local use 0 Switch E local use 0 AAA E local use 0 IP E local use 0 Apply Ca
305. w only if you want to make some settings the same for all ports Use this row first to set the common settings and then make adjustments on a port by port basis Note Changes in this row are copied to all the ports as soon as you make them Active Select this check box to activate STP on this port Priority Configure the priority for each port here Priority decides which port should be disabled when more than one port forms a loop in a switch Ports with a higher priority numeric value are disabled first The allowed range is between 0 and 255 and the default value is 128 Path Cost Path cost is the cost of transmitting a frame on to a LAN through that port It is assigned according to the speed of the bridge The slower the media the higher the cost see Table 22 on page 102 for more information Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to reset the fields 11 5 Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol Status Click Advanced Application Spanning Tree Protocol in the navigation panel to display the status screen as shown next See Section 11 1 on page 101 for more information on RSTP BS This screen is only available after you activate RSTP on the Switch ES 2108 Series User s Guide
306. ylight Saving Time at the same moment 1 A M GMT or UTC So in the European Union you would select Last Sunday March and the last field depends on your time zone In Germany for instance you would select 2 00 because Germany s time zone is one hour ahead of GMT or UTC GMT 1 End Date Configure the day and time when Daylight Saving Time ends if you selected Daylight Saving Time The time field uses the 24 hour format Here are a couple of examples Daylight Saving Time ends in the United States on the first Sunday of November Each time zone in the United States stops using Daylight Saving Time at 2 A M local time So in the United States you would select First Sunday November and 2 00 Daylight Saving Time ends in the European Union on the last Sunday of October All of the time zones in the European Union stop using Daylight Saving Time at the same moment 1 A M GMT or UTC So in the European Union you would select Last Sunday October and the last field depends on your time zone In Germany for instance you would select 2 00 because Germany s time zone is one hour ahead of GMT or UTC GMT 1 Apply Click Apply to save your changes to the Switch s run time memory The Switch loses these changes if it is turned off or loses power so use the Save link on the top navigation panel to save your changes to the non volatile memory when you are done configuring Cancel Click Cancel to reset the fields to your previ

ES-2108 Series Ethernet Switch User's Guide

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents